@@ -1,34 +1,50 @@
1−---
2−title: Pandoc User's Guide
3−author: John MacFarlane
4−date: June 20, 2021
5−---
1+% Pandoc User's Guide
2+% John MacFarlane
3+% December 27, 2017
64
7−# Synopsis
5+Synopsis
6+========
87
98`pandoc` [*options*] [*input-file*]...
109
11−# Description
10+Description
11+===========
1212
1313Pandoc is a [Haskell] library for converting from one markup format to
14−another, and a command-line tool that uses this library.
15−
16−Pandoc can convert between numerous markup and word processing formats,
17−including, but not limited to, various flavors of [Markdown], [HTML],
18−[LaTeX] and [Word docx]. For the full lists of input and output formats,
19−see the `--from` and `--to` [options below][General options].
20−Pandoc can also produce [PDF] output: see [creating a PDF], below.
21−
22−Pandoc's enhanced version of Markdown includes syntax for [tables],
23−[definition lists], [metadata blocks], [footnotes], [citations], [math],
24−and much more. See below under [Pandoc's Markdown].
25−
26−Pandoc has a modular design: it consists of a set of readers, which parse
27−text in a given format and produce a native representation of the document
28−(an _abstract syntax tree_ or AST), and a set of writers, which convert
14+another, and a command-line tool that uses this library. It can read
15+[Markdown], [CommonMark], [PHP Markdown Extra], [GitHub-Flavored
16+Markdown], [MultiMarkdown], and (subsets of) [Textile],
17+[reStructuredText], [HTML], [LaTeX], [MediaWiki markup], [TWiki
18+markup], [TikiWiki markup], [Creole 1.0], [Haddock markup], [OPML],
19+[Emacs Org mode], [DocBook], [JATS], [Muse], [txt2tags], [Vimwiki],
20+[EPUB], [ODT], and [Word docx]; and it can write plain text, [Markdown],
21+[CommonMark], [PHP Markdown Extra], [GitHub-Flavored Markdown],
22+[MultiMarkdown], [reStructuredText], [XHTML], [HTML5], [LaTeX]
23+\(including [`beamer`] slide shows\), [ConTeXt], [RTF], [OPML],
24+[DocBook], [JATS], [OpenDocument], [ODT], [Word docx], [GNU Texinfo],
25+[MediaWiki markup], [DokuWiki markup], [ZimWiki markup], [Haddock
26+markup], [EPUB] \(v2 or v3\), [FictionBook2], [Textile], [groff man],
27+[groff ms], [Emacs Org mode], [AsciiDoc], [InDesign ICML], [TEI
28+Simple], [Muse], [PowerPoint] slide shows and [Slidy], [Slideous],
29+[DZSlides], [reveal.js] or [S5] HTML slide shows. It can also produce
30+[PDF] output on systems where LaTeX, ConTeXt, `pdfroff`,
31+`wkhtmltopdf`, `prince`, or `weasyprint` is installed.
32+
33+Pandoc's enhanced version of Markdown includes syntax for [footnotes],
34+[tables], flexible [ordered lists], [definition lists], [fenced code
35+blocks], [superscripts and subscripts], [strikeout], [metadata blocks],
36+automatic tables of contents, embedded LaTeX [math], [citations], and
37+[Markdown inside HTML block elements][Extension:
38+`markdown_in_html_blocks`]. (These enhancements, described further under
39+[Pandoc's Markdown], can be disabled using the `markdown_strict` input
40+or output format.)
41+
42+In contrast to most existing tools for converting Markdown to HTML, which
43+use regex substitutions, pandoc has a modular design: it consists of a
44+set of readers, which parse text in a given format and produce a native
45+representation of the document, and a set of writers, which convert
2946this native representation into a target format. Thus, adding an input
30−or output format requires only adding a reader or writer. Users can also
31−run custom [pandoc filters] to modify the intermediate AST.
47+or output format requires only adding a reader or writer.
3248
3349Because pandoc's intermediate representation of a document is less
3450expressive than many of the formats it converts between, one should
@@ -40,33 +56,98 @@ model. While conversions from pandoc's Markdown to all formats aspire
4056to be perfect, conversions from formats more expressive than pandoc's
4157Markdown can be expected to be lossy.
4258
43−## Using pandoc
59+[Markdown]: http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/
60+[CommonMark]: http://commonmark.org
61+[PHP Markdown Extra]: https://michelf.ca/projects/php-markdown/extra/
62+[GitHub-Flavored Markdown]: https://help.github.com/articles/github-flavored-markdown/
63+[MultiMarkdown]: http://fletcherpenney.net/multimarkdown/
64+[reStructuredText]: http://docutils.sourceforge.net/docs/ref/rst/introduction.html
65+[S5]: http://meyerweb.com/eric/tools/s5/
66+[Slidy]: http://www.w3.org/Talks/Tools/Slidy/
67+[Slideous]: http://goessner.net/articles/slideous/
68+[HTML]: http://www.w3.org/html/
69+[HTML5]: http://www.w3.org/TR/html5/
70+[polyglot markup]: https://www.w3.org/TR/html-polyglot/
71+[XHTML]: http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/
72+[LaTeX]: http://latex-project.org
73+[`beamer`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer
74+[Beamer User's Guide]: http://ctan.math.utah.edu/ctan/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/beamer/doc/beameruserguide.pdf
75+[ConTeXt]: http://www.contextgarden.net/
76+[RTF]: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rich_Text_Format
77+[DocBook]: http://docbook.org
78+[JATS]: https://jats.nlm.nih.gov
79+[txt2tags]: http://txt2tags.org
80+[EPUB]: http://idpf.org/epub
81+[OPML]: http://dev.opml.org/spec2.html
82+[OpenDocument]: http://opendocument.xml.org
83+[ODT]: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OpenDocument
84+[Textile]: http://redcloth.org/textile
85+[MediaWiki markup]: https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Formatting
86+[DokuWiki markup]: https://www.dokuwiki.org/dokuwiki
87+[ZimWiki markup]: http://zim-wiki.org/manual/Help/Wiki_Syntax.html
88+[TWiki markup]: http://twiki.org/cgi-bin/view/TWiki/TextFormattingRules
89+[TikiWiki markup]: https://doc.tiki.org/Wiki-Syntax-Text#The_Markup_Language_Wiki-Syntax
90+[Haddock markup]: https://www.haskell.org/haddock/doc/html/ch03s08.html
91+[Creole 1.0]: http://www.wikicreole.org/wiki/Creole1.0
92+[groff man]: http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man7/groff_man.7.html
93+[groff ms]: http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man7/groff_ms.7.html
94+[Haskell]: https://www.haskell.org
95+[GNU Texinfo]: http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/
96+[Emacs Org mode]: http://orgmode.org
97+[AsciiDoc]: http://www.methods.co.nz/asciidoc/
98+[DZSlides]: http://paulrouget.com/dzslides/
99+[Word docx]: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Office_Open_XML
100+[PDF]: https://www.adobe.com/pdf/
101+[reveal.js]: http://lab.hakim.se/reveal-js/
102+[FictionBook2]: http://www.fictionbook.org/index.php/Eng:XML_Schema_Fictionbook_2.1
103+[InDesign ICML]: https://www.adobe.com/content/dam/Adobe/en/devnet/indesign/cs55-docs/IDML/idml-specification.pdf
104+[TEI Simple]: https://github.com/TEIC/TEI-Simple
105+[Muse]: https://amusewiki.org/library/manual
106+[PowerPoint]: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Microsoft_PowerPoint
107+[Vimwiki]: https://vimwiki.github.io
108+
109+Using `pandoc`
110+--------------
44111
45−If no *input-files* are specified, input is read from *stdin*.
46−Output goes to *stdout* by default. For output to a file,
47−use the `-o` option:
112+If no *input-file* is specified, input is read from *stdin*.
113+Otherwise, the *input-files* are concatenated (with a blank
114+line between each) and used as input. Output goes to *stdout* by
115+default (though output to the terminal is disabled for the
116+`odt`, `docx`, `epub2`, and `epub3` output formats, unless it is
117+forced using `-o -`). For output to a file, use the `-o`
118+option:
48119
49120 pandoc -o output.html input.txt
50121
51−By default, pandoc produces a document fragment. To produce a standalone
52−document (e.g. a valid HTML file including `<head>` and `<body>`),
53−use the `-s` or `--standalone` flag:
122+By default, pandoc produces a document fragment, not a standalone
123+document with a proper header and footer. To produce a standalone
124+document, use the `-s` or `--standalone` flag:
54125
55126 pandoc -s -o output.html input.txt
56127
57128For more information on how standalone documents are produced, see
58−[Templates] below.
129+[Templates], below.
59130
60−If multiple input files are given, `pandoc` will concatenate them all (with
61−blank lines between them) before parsing. (Use `--file-scope` to parse files
62−individually.)
131+Instead of a file, an absolute URI may be given. In this case
132+pandoc will fetch the content using HTTP:
133+
134+ pandoc -f html -t markdown http://www.fsf.org
135+
136+It is possible to supply a custom User-Agent string or other
137+header when requesting a document from a URL:
138+
139+ pandoc -f html -t markdown --request-header User-Agent:"Mozilla/5.0" \
140+ http://www.fsf.org
63141
64−## Specifying formats
142+If multiple input files are given, `pandoc` will concatenate them all (with
143+blank lines between them) before parsing. This feature is disabled for
144+ binary input formats such as `EPUB`, `odt`, and `docx`.
65145
66146The format of the input and output can be specified explicitly using
67147command-line options. The input format can be specified using the
68−`-f/--from` option, the output format using the `-t/--to` option.
69−Thus, to convert `hello.txt` from Markdown to LaTeX, you could type:
148+`-r/--read` or `-f/--from` options, the output format using the
149+`-w/--write` or `-t/--to` options. Thus, to convert `hello.txt` from
150+Markdown to LaTeX, you could type:
70151
71152 pandoc -f markdown -t latex hello.txt
72153
@@ -74,15 +155,14 @@ To convert `hello.html` from HTML to Markdown:
74155
75156 pandoc -f html -t markdown hello.html
76157
77−Supported input and output formats are listed below under [Options]
78−(see `-f` for input formats and `-t` for output formats). You
79−can also use `pandoc --list-input-formats` and
80−`pandoc --list-output-formats` to print lists of supported
81−formats.
158+Supported output formats are listed below under the `-t/--to` option.
159+Supported input formats are listed below under the `-f/--from` option. Note
160+that the `rst`, `textile`, `latex`, and `html` readers are not complete;
161+there are some constructs that they do not parse.
82162
83163If the input or output format is not specified explicitly, `pandoc`
84−will attempt to guess it from the extensions of the filenames.
85−Thus, for example,
164+will attempt to guess it from the extensions of
165+the input and output filenames. Thus, for example,
86166
87167 pandoc -o hello.tex hello.txt
88168
@@ -91,9 +171,7 @@ is specified (so that output goes to *stdout*), or if the output file's
91171extension is unknown, the output format will default to HTML.
92172If no input file is specified (so that input comes from *stdin*), or
93173if the input files' extensions are unknown, the input format will
94−be assumed to be Markdown.
95−
96−## Character encoding
174+be assumed to be Markdown unless explicitly specified.
97175
98176Pandoc uses the UTF-8 character encoding for both input and output.
99177If your local character encoding is not UTF-8, you
@@ -106,167 +184,106 @@ RTF, OPML, DocBook, and Texinfo), information about
106184the character encoding is included in the document header, which
107185will only be included if you use the `-s/--standalone` option.
108186
109−[`iconv`]: https://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv/
187+[`iconv`]: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv/
110188
111−## Creating a PDF
189+Creating a PDF
190+--------------
112191
113−To produce a PDF, specify an output file with a `.pdf` extension:
192+To produce a PDF, specify an output file with a `.pdf` extension.
193+By default, pandoc will use LaTeX to create the PDF:
114194
115195 pandoc test.txt -o test.pdf
116196
117−By default, pandoc will use LaTeX to create the PDF, which requires
118−that a LaTeX engine be installed (see `--pdf-engine` below).
119−Alternatively, pandoc can use ConTeXt, roff ms, or HTML as an
120−intermediate format. To do this, specify an output file with a
121−`.pdf` extension, as before, but add the `--pdf-engine` option
122−or `-t context`, `-t html`, or `-t ms` to the command line.
123−The tool used to generate the PDF from the intermediate format
124−may be specified using `--pdf-engine`.
125−
126−You can control the PDF style using variables, depending on
127−the intermediate format used: see [variables for LaTeX],
128−[variables for ConTeXt], [variables for `wkhtmltopdf`],
129−[variables for ms]. When HTML is used as an intermediate
130−format, the output can be styled using `--css`.
131−
132−To debug the PDF creation, it can be useful to look at the intermediate
133−representation: instead of `-o test.pdf`, use for example `-s -o test.tex`
134−to output the generated LaTeX. You can then test it with `pdflatex test.tex`.
135−
136−When using LaTeX, the following packages need to be available
137−(they are included with all recent versions of [TeX Live]):
138−[`amsfonts`], [`amsmath`], [`lm`], [`unicode-math`],
139−[`iftex`], [`listings`] (if the
197+Production of a PDF requires that a LaTeX engine be installed (see
198+`--pdf-engine`, below), and assumes that the following LaTeX packages
199+are available: [`amsfonts`], [`amsmath`], [`lm`], [`unicode-math`],
200+[`ifxetex`], [`ifluatex`], [`listings`] (if the
140201`--listings` option is used), [`fancyvrb`], [`longtable`],
141−[`booktabs`], [`graphicx`] (if the document
142−contains images), [`hyperref`], [`xcolor`],
143−[`ulem`], [`geometry`] (with the `geometry` variable set),
144−[`setspace`] (with `linestretch`), and
202+[`booktabs`], [`graphicx`] and [`grffile`] (if the document
203+contains images), [`hyperref`], [`xcolor`] (with `colorlinks`), [`ulem`], [`geometry`] (with the
204+`geometry` variable set), [`setspace`] (with `linestretch`), and
145205[`babel`] (with `lang`). The use of `xelatex` or `lualatex` as
146−the PDF engine requires [`fontspec`]. `lualatex` uses
147−[`selnolig`]. `xelatex` uses [`polyglossia`] (with `lang`),
148−[`xecjk`], and [`bidi`] (with the `dir` variable set). If the
149−`mathspec` variable is set, `xelatex` will use [`mathspec`]
150−instead of [`unicode-math`]. The [`upquote`] and [`microtype`]
151−packages are used if available, and [`csquotes`] will be used
152−for [typography] if the `csquotes` variable or metadata field is
153−set to a true value. The [`natbib`], [`biblatex`], [`bibtex`],
154−and [`biber`] packages can optionally be used for [citation
155−rendering]. The following packages will be used to improve
156−output quality if present, but pandoc does not require them to
157−be present: [`upquote`] (for straight quotes in verbatim
158−environments), [`microtype`] (for better spacing adjustments),
159−[`parskip`] (for better inter-paragraph spaces), [`xurl`] (for
160−better line breaks in URLs), [`bookmark`] (for better PDF
161−bookmarks), and [`footnotehyper`] or [`footnote`] (to allow
162−footnotes in tables).
163−
164−[TeX Live]: https://www.tug.org/texlive/
206+the LaTeX engine requires [`fontspec`]. `xelatex` uses
207+[`polyglossia`] (with `lang`), [`xecjk`], and [`bidi`] (with the
208+`dir` variable set). If the `mathspec` variable is set,
209+`xelatex` will use [`mathspec`] instead of [`unicode-math`].
210+The [`upquote`] and [`microtype`] packages are used if
211+available, and [`csquotes`] will be used for [typography]
212+if added to the template or included in any header file. The
213+[`natbib`], [`biblatex`], [`bibtex`], and [`biber`] packages can
214+optionally be used for [citation rendering]. These are included
215+with all recent versions of [TeX Live].
216+
217+Alternatively, pandoc can use [ConTeXt], `pdfroff`, or any of the
218+following HTML/CSS-to-PDF-engines, to create a PDF: [`wkhtmltopdf`],
219+[`weasyprint`] or [`prince`].
220+To do this, specify an output file with a `.pdf` extension, as before,
221+but add the `--pdf-engine` option or `-t context`, `-t html`, or `-t ms`
222+to the command line (`-t html` defaults to `--pdf-engine=wkhtmltopdf`).
223+
224+PDF output can be controlled using [variables for LaTeX] (if
225+LaTeX is used) and [variables for ConTeXt] (if ConTeXt is used).
226+When using an HTML/CSS-to-PDF-engine, `--css` affects the output.
227+If `wkhtmltopdf` is used, then the variables `margin-left`,
228+`margin-right`, `margin-top`, `margin-bottom`, and `papersize`
229+will affect the output.
230+
165231[`amsfonts`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/amsfonts
166232[`amsmath`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/amsmath
167−[`babel`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/babel
168−[`biber`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/biber
169−[`biblatex`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/biblatex
170−[`bibtex`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/bibtex
171−[`bidi`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/bidi
172−[`bookmark`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/bookmark
173−[`booktabs`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs
174−[`csquotes`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/csquotes
233+[`lm`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/lm
234+[`ifxetex`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/ifxetex
235+[`ifluatex`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/ifluatex
236+[`listings`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/listings
175237[`fancyvrb`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/fancyvrb
176−[`fontspec`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/fontspec
177−[`footnote`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/footnote
178−[`footnotehyper`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/footnotehyper
179−[`geometry`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/geometry
238+[`longtable`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/longtable
239+[`booktabs`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs
180240[`graphicx`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/graphicx
181241[`grffile`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/grffile
182−[`hyperref`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
183−[`iftex`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/iftex
184−[`listings`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/listings
185−[`lm`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/lm
186−[`longtable`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/longtable
187−[`mathspec`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/mathspec
188−[`microtype`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/microtype
189−[`natbib`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/natbib
190−[`parskip`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/parskip
191−[`polyglossia`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/polyglossia
192−[`prince`]: https://www.princexml.com/
242+[`geometry`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/geometry
193243[`setspace`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/setspace
244+[`xecjk`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/xecjk
245+[`hyperref`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
194246[`ulem`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/ulem
247+[`babel`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/babel
248+[`bidi`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/bidi
249+[`mathspec`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/mathspec
195250[`unicode-math`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/unicode-math
251+[`polyglossia`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/polyglossia
252+[`fontspec`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/fontspec
196253[`upquote`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/upquote
197−[`weasyprint`]: https://weasyprint.org
254+[`microtype`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/microtype
255+[`csquotes`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/csquotes
256+[`natbib`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/natbib
257+[`biblatex`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/biblatex
258+[`bibtex`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/bibtex
259+[`biber`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/biber
260+[TeX Live]: http://www.tug.org/texlive/
198261[`wkhtmltopdf`]: https://wkhtmltopdf.org
199−[`xcolor`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/xcolor
200−[`xecjk`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/xecjk
201−[`xurl`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/xurl
202−[`selnolig`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/selnolig
203−
204−
205−
206−## Reading from the Web
207−
208−Instead of an input file, an absolute URI may be given. In this case
209−pandoc will fetch the content using HTTP:
210−
211− pandoc -f html -t markdown https://www.fsf.org
212−
213−It is possible to supply a custom User-Agent string or other
214−header when requesting a document from a URL:
215−
216− pandoc -f html -t markdown --request-header User-Agent:"Mozilla/5.0" \
217− https://www.fsf.org
262+[`weasyprint`]: http://weasyprint.org
263+[`prince`]: https://www.princexml.com/
218264
219−# Options
265+Options
266+=======
220267
221−## General options {.options}
268+General options
269+---------------
222270
223271`-f` *FORMAT*, `-r` *FORMAT*, `--from=`*FORMAT*, `--read=`*FORMAT*
224272
225−: Specify input format. *FORMAT* can be:
226−
227− ::: {#input-formats}
228− - `bibtex` ([BibTeX] bibliography)
229− - `biblatex` ([BibLaTeX] bibliography)
230− - `commonmark` ([CommonMark] Markdown)
231− - `commonmark_x` ([CommonMark] Markdown with extensions)
232− - `creole` ([Creole 1.0])
233− - `csljson` ([CSL JSON] bibliography)
234− - `csv` ([CSV] table)
235− - `docbook` ([DocBook])
236− - `docx` ([Word docx])
237− - `dokuwiki` ([DokuWiki markup])
238− - `epub` ([EPUB])
239− - `fb2` ([FictionBook2] e-book)
240− - `gfm` ([GitHub-Flavored Markdown]),
241− or the deprecated and less accurate `markdown_github`;
242− use [`markdown_github`](#markdown-variants) only
243− if you need extensions not supported in [`gfm`](#markdown-variants).
244− - `haddock` ([Haddock markup])
245− - `html` ([HTML])
246− - `ipynb` ([Jupyter notebook])
247− - `jats` ([JATS] XML)
248− - `jira` ([Jira]/Confluence wiki markup)
249− - `json` (JSON version of native AST)
250− - `latex` ([LaTeX])
251− - `markdown` ([Pandoc's Markdown])
252− - `markdown_mmd` ([MultiMarkdown])
253− - `markdown_phpextra` ([PHP Markdown Extra])
254− - `markdown_strict` (original unextended [Markdown])
255− - `mediawiki` ([MediaWiki markup])
256− - `man` ([roff man])
257− - `muse` ([Muse])
258− - `native` (native Haskell)
259− - `odt` ([ODT])
260− - `opml` ([OPML])
261− - `org` ([Emacs Org mode])
262− - `rst` ([reStructuredText])
263− - `t2t` ([txt2tags])
264− - `textile` ([Textile])
265− - `tikiwiki` ([TikiWiki markup])
266− - `twiki` ([TWiki markup])
267− - `vimwiki` ([Vimwiki])
268− :::
269−
273+: Specify input format. *FORMAT* can be `native` (native Haskell),
274+ `json` (JSON version of native AST), `markdown` (pandoc's
275+ extended Markdown), `markdown_strict` (original unextended
276+ Markdown), `markdown_phpextra` (PHP Markdown Extra),
277+ `markdown_mmd` (MultiMarkdown), `gfm` (GitHub-Flavored Markdown),
278+ `commonmark` (CommonMark Markdown), `textile` (Textile), `rst`
279+ (reStructuredText), `html` (HTML), `docbook` (DocBook), `t2t`
280+ (txt2tags), `docx` (docx), `odt` (ODT), `epub` (EPUB), `opml` (OPML),
281+ `org` (Emacs Org mode), `mediawiki` (MediaWiki markup), `twiki` (TWiki
282+ markup), `tikiwiki` (TikiWiki markup), `creole` (Creole 1.0),
283+ `haddock` (Haddock markup), or `latex` (LaTeX).
284+ (`markdown_github` provides deprecated and less accurate support
285+ for Github-Flavored Markdown; please use `gfm` instead, unless you
286+ need to use extensions other than `smart`.)
270287 Extensions can be individually enabled or disabled by
271288 appending `+EXTENSION` or `-EXTENSION` to the format name.
272289 See [Extensions] below, for a list of extensions and
@@ -275,75 +292,35 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
275292
276293`-t` *FORMAT*, `-w` *FORMAT*, `--to=`*FORMAT*, `--write=`*FORMAT*
277294
278−: Specify output format. *FORMAT* can be:
279−
280− ::: {#output-formats}
281− - `asciidoc` ([AsciiDoc]) or `asciidoctor` ([AsciiDoctor])
282− - `beamer` ([LaTeX beamer][`beamer`] slide show)
283− - `bibtex` ([BibTeX] bibliography)
284− - `biblatex` ([BibLaTeX] bibliography)
285− - `commonmark` ([CommonMark] Markdown)
286− - `commonmark_x` ([CommonMark] Markdown with extensions)
287− - `context` ([ConTeXt])
288− - `csljson` ([CSL JSON] bibliography)
289− - `docbook` or `docbook4` ([DocBook] 4)
290− - `docbook5` (DocBook 5)
291− - `docx` ([Word docx])
292− - `dokuwiki` ([DokuWiki markup])
293− - `epub` or `epub3` ([EPUB] v3 book)
294− - `epub2` (EPUB v2)
295− - `fb2` ([FictionBook2] e-book)
296− - `gfm` ([GitHub-Flavored Markdown]),
297− or the deprecated and less accurate `markdown_github`;
298− use [`markdown_github`](#markdown-variants) only
299− if you need extensions not supported in [`gfm`](#markdown-variants).
300− - `haddock` ([Haddock markup])
301− - `html` or `html5` ([HTML], i.e. [HTML5]/XHTML [polyglot markup])
302− - `html4` ([XHTML] 1.0 Transitional)
303− - `icml` ([InDesign ICML])
304− - `ipynb` ([Jupyter notebook])
305− - `jats_archiving` ([JATS] XML, Archiving and Interchange Tag Set)
306− - `jats_articleauthoring` ([JATS] XML, Article Authoring Tag Set)
307− - `jats_publishing` ([JATS] XML, Journal Publishing Tag Set)
308− - `jats` (alias for `jats_archiving`)
309− - `jira` ([Jira]/Confluence wiki markup)
310− - `json` (JSON version of native AST)
311− - `latex` ([LaTeX])
312− - `man` ([roff man])
313− - `markdown` ([Pandoc's Markdown])
314− - `markdown_mmd` ([MultiMarkdown])
315− - `markdown_phpextra` ([PHP Markdown Extra])
316− - `markdown_strict` (original unextended [Markdown])
317− - `mediawiki` ([MediaWiki markup])
318− - `ms` ([roff ms])
319− - `muse` ([Muse]),
320− - `native` (native Haskell),
321− - `odt` ([OpenOffice text document][ODT])
322− - `opml` ([OPML])
323− - `opendocument` ([OpenDocument])
324− - `org` ([Emacs Org mode])
325− - `pdf` ([PDF])
326− - `plain` (plain text),
327− - `pptx` ([PowerPoint] slide show)
328− - `rst` ([reStructuredText])
329− - `rtf` ([Rich Text Format])
330− - `texinfo` ([GNU Texinfo])
331− - `textile` ([Textile])
332− - `slideous` ([Slideous] HTML and JavaScript slide show)
333− - `slidy` ([Slidy] HTML and JavaScript slide show)
334− - `dzslides` ([DZSlides] HTML5 + JavaScript slide show),
335− - `revealjs` ([reveal.js] HTML5 + JavaScript slide show)
336− - `s5` ([S5] HTML and JavaScript slide show)
337− - `tei` ([TEI Simple])
338− - `xwiki` ([XWiki markup])
339− - `zimwiki` ([ZimWiki markup])
340− - the path of a custom Lua writer, see [Custom writers] below
341− :::
342−
343− Note that `odt`, `docx`, `epub`, and `pdf` output will not be directed
344− to *stdout* unless forced with `-o -`.
345−
346− Extensions can be individually enabled or
295+: Specify output format. *FORMAT* can be `native` (native Haskell),
296+ `json` (JSON version of native AST), `plain` (plain text),
297+ `markdown` (pandoc's extended Markdown), `markdown_strict`
298+ (original unextended Markdown), `markdown_phpextra` (PHP Markdown
299+ Extra), `markdown_mmd` (MultiMarkdown), `gfm` (GitHub-Flavored
300+ Markdown), `commonmark` (CommonMark Markdown), `rst`
301+ (reStructuredText), `html4` (XHTML 1.0 Transitional), `html` or
302+ `html5` (HTML5/XHTML [polyglot markup]), `latex` (LaTeX), `beamer`
303+ (LaTeX beamer slide show), `context` (ConTeXt), `man` (groff man),
304+ `mediawiki` (MediaWiki markup), `dokuwiki` (DokuWiki markup),
305+ `zimwiki` (ZimWiki markup), `textile` (Textile), `org` (Emacs Org
306+ mode), `texinfo` (GNU Texinfo), `opml` (OPML), `docbook` or
307+ `docbook4` (DocBook 4), `docbook5` (DocBook 5), `jats` (JATS XML),
308+ `opendocument` (OpenDocument), `odt` (OpenOffice text document),
309+ `docx` (Word docx), `haddock` (Haddock markup), `rtf` (rich text
310+ format), `epub2` (EPUB v2 book), `epub` or `epub3` (EPUB v3),
311+ `fb2` (FictionBook2 e-book), `asciidoc` (AsciiDoc), `icml`
312+ (InDesign ICML), `tei` (TEI Simple), `slidy` (Slidy HTML and
313+ JavaScript slide show), `slideous` (Slideous HTML and JavaScript
314+ slide show), `dzslides` (DZSlides HTML5 + JavaScript slide show),
315+ `revealjs` (reveal.js HTML5 + JavaScript slide show), `s5` (S5
316+ HTML and JavaScript slide show), `pptx` (PowerPoint slide show) or
317+ the path of a custom lua writer (see [Custom writers],
318+ below). (`markdown_github` provides deprecated and less accurate
319+ support for Github-Flavored Markdown; please use `gfm` instead,
320+ unless you use extensions that do not work with `gfm`.) Note that
321+ `odt`, `epub`, and `epub3` output will not be directed to
322+ *stdout*; an output filename must be specified using the
323+ `-o/--output` option. Extensions can be individually enabled or
347324 disabled by appending `+EXTENSION` or `-EXTENSION` to the format
348325 name. See [Extensions] below, for a list of extensions and their
349326 names. See `--list-output-formats` and `--list-extensions`, below.
@@ -358,43 +335,35 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
358335
359336: Specify the user data directory to search for pandoc data files.
360337 If this option is not specified, the default user data directory
361− will be used. On \*nix and macOS systems this will be the `pandoc`
362− subdirectory of the XDG data directory (by default,
363− `$HOME/.local/share`, overridable by setting the `XDG_DATA_HOME`
364− environment variable). If that directory does not exist and
365− `$HOME/.pandoc` exists, it will be used (for backwards compatibility).
366− On Windows the default user data directory is
367− `C:\Users\USERNAME\AppData\Roaming\pandoc`.
338+ will be used. This is, in UNIX:
339+
340+ $HOME/.pandoc
341+
342+ in Windows XP:
343+
344+ C:\Documents And Settings\USERNAME\Application Data\pandoc
345+
346+ and in Windows Vista or later:
347+
348+ C:\Users\USERNAME\AppData\Roaming\pandoc
349+
368350 You can find the default user data directory on your system by
369351 looking at the output of `pandoc --version`.
370− Data files placed in this directory (for example, `reference.odt`,
371− `reference.docx`, `epub.css`, `templates`) will override
372− pandoc's normal defaults.
373−
374−`-d` *FILE*, `--defaults=`*FILE*
375−
376−: Specify a set of default option settings. *FILE* is a YAML
377− file whose fields correspond to command-line option
378− settings. All options for document conversion, including input
379− and output files, can be set using a defaults file. The file will
380− be searched for first in the working directory, and then in
381− the `defaults` subdirectory of the user data directory
382− (see `--data-dir`). The `.yaml` extension may be omitted.
383− See the section [Default files] for more information on the
384− file format. Settings from the defaults file may be
385− overridden or extended by subsequent options on the command
386− line.
352+ A `reference.odt`, `reference.docx`, `epub.css`, `templates`,
353+ `slidy`, `slideous`, or `s5` directory
354+ placed in this directory will override pandoc's normal defaults.
387355
388356`--bash-completion`
389357
390358: Generate a bash completion script. To enable bash completion
391359 with pandoc, add this to your `.bashrc`:
392360
393− eval "$(pandoc --bash-completion)"
361+ eval "$(pandoc --bash-completion)"
394362
395363`--verbose`
396364
397−: Give verbose debugging output.
365+: Give verbose debugging output. Currently this only has an effect
366+ with PDF output.
398367
399368`--quiet`
400369
@@ -420,7 +389,7 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
420389
421390`--list-extensions`[`=`*FORMAT*]
422391
423−: List supported extensions for *FORMAT*, one per line, preceded
392+: List supported Markdown extensions, one per line, preceded
424393 by a `+` or `-` indicating whether it is enabled by default
425394 in *FORMAT*. If *FORMAT* is not specified, defaults for
426395 pandoc's Markdown are given.
@@ -443,88 +412,12 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
443412
444413: Show usage message.
445414
446−[Markdown]: https://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/
447−[CommonMark]: https://commonmark.org
448−[PHP Markdown Extra]: https://michelf.ca/projects/php-markdown/extra/
449−[GitHub-Flavored Markdown]: https://help.github.com/articles/github-flavored-markdown/
450−[MultiMarkdown]: https://fletcherpenney.net/multimarkdown/
451−[reStructuredText]: https://docutils.sourceforge.io/docs/ref/rst/introduction.html
452−[S5]: https://meyerweb.com/eric/tools/s5/
453−[Slidy]: https://www.w3.org/Talks/Tools/Slidy2/
454−[Slideous]: https://goessner.net/articles/slideous/
455−[HTML]: https://www.w3.org/html/
456−[HTML5]: https://html.spec.whatwg.org/
457−[polyglot markup]: https://www.w3.org/TR/html-polyglot/
458−[XHTML]: https://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/
459−[LaTeX]: https://www.latex-project.org/
460−[`beamer`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer
461−[Beamer User's Guide]: http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/beamer/doc/beameruserguide.pdf
462−[ConTeXt]: https://www.contextgarden.net/
463−[Rich Text Format]: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rich_Text_Format
464−[DocBook]: https://docbook.org
465−[JATS]: https://jats.nlm.nih.gov
466−[Jira]: https://jira.atlassian.com/secure/WikiRendererHelpAction.jspa?section=all
467−[txt2tags]: https://txt2tags.org
468−[EPUB]: http://idpf.org/epub
469−[OPML]: http://dev.opml.org/spec2.html
470−[OpenDocument]: http://opendocument.xml.org
471−[ODT]: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OpenDocument
472−[Textile]: https://www.promptworks.com/textile
473−[MediaWiki markup]: https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Formatting
474−[DokuWiki markup]: https://www.dokuwiki.org/dokuwiki
475−[ZimWiki markup]: https://zim-wiki.org/manual/Help/Wiki_Syntax.html
476−[XWiki markup]: https://www.xwiki.org/xwiki/bin/view/Documentation/UserGuide/Features/XWikiSyntax/
477−[TWiki markup]: https://twiki.org/cgi-bin/view/TWiki/TextFormattingRules
478−[TikiWiki markup]: https://doc.tiki.org/Wiki-Syntax-Text#The_Markup_Language_Wiki-Syntax
479−[Haddock markup]: https://www.haskell.org/haddock/doc/html/ch03s08.html
480−[Creole 1.0]: http://www.wikicreole.org/wiki/Creole1.0
481−[CSV]: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4180
482−[roff man]: https://man.cx/groff_man(7)
483−[roff ms]: https://man.cx/groff_ms(7)
484−[Haskell]: https://www.haskell.org
485−[GNU Texinfo]: https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/
486−[Emacs Org mode]: https://orgmode.org
487−[AsciiDoc]: https://www.methods.co.nz/asciidoc/
488−[AsciiDoctor]: https://asciidoctor.org/
489−[DZSlides]: https://paulrouget.com/dzslides/
490−[Word docx]: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Office_Open_XML
491−[PDF]: https://www.adobe.com/pdf/
492−[reveal.js]: https://revealjs.com/
493−[FictionBook2]: http://www.fictionbook.org/index.php/Eng:XML_Schema_Fictionbook_2.1
494−[Jupyter notebook]: https://nbformat.readthedocs.io/en/latest/
495−[InDesign ICML]: https://wwwimages.adobe.com/www.adobe.com/content/dam/acom/en/devnet/indesign/sdk/cs6/idml/idml-cookbook.pdf
496−[TEI Simple]: https://github.com/TEIC/TEI-Simple
497−[Muse]: https://amusewiki.org/library/manual
498−[PowerPoint]: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Microsoft_PowerPoint
499−[Vimwiki]: https://vimwiki.github.io
500−[CSL JSON]: https://citeproc-js.readthedocs.io/en/latest/csl-json/markup.html
501−[BibTeX]: https://ctan.org/pkg/bibtex
502−[BibLaTeX]: https://ctan.org/pkg/biblatex
503−
504−## Reader options {.options}
505−
506−`--shift-heading-level-by=`*NUMBER*
507−
508−: Shift heading levels by a positive or negative integer.
509− For example, with `--shift-heading-level-by=-1`, level 2
510− headings become level 1 headings, and level 3 headings
511− become level 2 headings. Headings cannot have a level
512− less than 1, so a heading that would be shifted below level 1
513− becomes a regular paragraph. Exception: with a shift of -N,
514− a level-N heading at the beginning of the document
515− replaces the metadata title. `--shift-heading-level-by=-1`
516− is a good choice when converting HTML or Markdown documents that
517− use an initial level-1 heading for the document title and
518− level-2+ headings for sections. `--shift-heading-level-by=1`
519− may be a good choice for converting Markdown documents that
520− use level-1 headings for sections to HTML, since pandoc uses
521− a level-1 heading to render the document title.
415+Reader options
416+--------------
522417
523418`--base-header-level=`*NUMBER*
524419
525−: *Deprecated. Use `--shift-heading-level-by`=X instead,
526− where X = NUMBER - 1.* Specify the base level for headings
527− (defaults to 1).
420+: Specify the base level for headers (defaults to 1).
528421
529422`--strip-empty-paragraphs`
530423
@@ -554,7 +447,7 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
554447 footnotes and links will not work across files. Reading binary
555448 files (docx, odt, epub) implies `--file-scope`.
556449
557−`-F` *PROGRAM*, `--filter=`*PROGRAM*
450+`--filter=`*PROGRAM*
558451
559452: Specify an executable to be used as a filter transforming the
560453 pandoc AST after the input is parsed and before the output is
@@ -589,65 +482,47 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
589482
590483 3. `$PATH` (executable only)
591484
592− Filters, Lua-filters, and citeproc processing are applied in
593− the order specified on the command line.
594−
595−`-L` *SCRIPT*, `--lua-filter=`*SCRIPT*
485+`--lua-filter=`*SCRIPT*
596486
597487: Transform the document in a similar fashion as JSON filters (see
598− `--filter`), but use pandoc's built-in Lua filtering system. The given
599− Lua script is expected to return a list of Lua filters which will be
600− applied in order. Each Lua filter must contain element-transforming
488+ `--filter`), but use pandoc's build-in lua filtering system. The given
489+ lua script is expected to return a list of lua filters which will be
490+ applied in order. Each lua filter must contain element-transforming
601491 functions indexed by the name of the AST element on which the filter
602492 function should be applied.
603493
604− The `pandoc` Lua module provides helper functions for element
605− creation. It is always loaded into the script's Lua environment.
606−
607− See the [Lua filters documentation] for further details.
494+ The `pandoc` lua module provides helper functions for element
495+ creation. It is always loaded into the script's lua environment.
608496
609− In order of preference, pandoc will look for Lua filters in
497+ The following is an example lua script for macro-expansion:
610498
611− 1. a specified full or relative path
499+ function expand_hello_world(inline)
500+ if inline.c == '{{helloworld}}' then
501+ return pandoc.Emph{ pandoc.Str "Hello, World" }
502+ else
503+ return inline
504+ end
505+ end
612506
613− 2. `$DATADIR/filters` where `$DATADIR` is the user data
614− directory (see `--data-dir`, above).
507+ return {{Str = expand_hello_world}}
615508
616− Filters, Lua filters, and citeproc processing are applied in
617− the order specified on the command line.
618509
619510`-M` *KEY*[`=`*VAL*], `--metadata=`*KEY*[`:`*VAL*]
620511
621512: Set the metadata field *KEY* to the value *VAL*. A value specified
622− on the command line overrides a value specified in the document
623− using [YAML metadata blocks][Extension: `yaml_metadata_block`].
513+ on the command line overrides a value specified in the document.
624514 Values will be parsed as YAML boolean or string values. If no value is
625515 specified, the value will be treated as Boolean true. Like
626516 `--variable`, `--metadata` causes template variables to be set.
627517 But unlike `--variable`, `--metadata` affects the metadata of the
628518 underlying document (which is accessible from filters and may be
629− printed in some output formats) and metadata values will be escaped
630− when inserted into the template.
631−
632−`--metadata-file=`*FILE*
633−
634−: Read metadata from the supplied YAML (or JSON) file. This
635− option can be used with every input format, but string scalars
636− in the YAML file will always be parsed as Markdown. Generally,
637− the input will be handled the same as in [YAML metadata
638− blocks][Extension: `yaml_metadata_block`]. This option can be
639− used repeatedly to include multiple metadata files; values in
640− files specified later on the command line will be preferred
641− over those specified in earlier files. Metadata values
642− specified inside the document, or by using `-M`, overwrite
643− values specified with this option.
519+ printed in some output formats).
644520
645521`-p`, `--preserve-tabs`
646522
647−: Preserve tabs instead of converting them to spaces. (By default, pandoc
648− converts tabs to spaces before parsing its input.) Note that this will
649− only affect tabs in literal code spans and code blocks. Tabs in regular
650− text are always treated as spaces.
523+: Preserve tabs instead of converting them to spaces (the default).
524+ Note that this will only affect tabs in literal code spans and code
525+ blocks; tabs in regular text will be treated as spaces.
651526
652527`--tab-stop=`*NUMBER*
653528
@@ -657,30 +532,27 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
657532
658533: Specifies what to do with insertions, deletions, and comments
659534 produced by the MS Word "Track Changes" feature. `accept` (the
660− default) processes all the insertions and deletions.
661− `reject` ignores them. Both `accept` and `reject` ignore comments.
662− `all` includes all insertions, deletions, and comments, wrapped
663− in spans with `insertion`, `deletion`, `comment-start`, and
664− `comment-end` classes, respectively. The author and time of
665− change is included. `all` is useful for scripting: only
666− accepting changes from a certain reviewer, say, or before a
667− certain date. If a paragraph is inserted or deleted,
668− `track-changes=all` produces a span with the class
669− `paragraph-insertion`/`paragraph-deletion` before the
670− affected paragraph break. This option only affects the docx
671− reader.
535+ default), inserts all insertions, and ignores all
536+ deletions. `reject` inserts all deletions and ignores
537+ insertions. Both `accept` and `reject` ignore comments. `all` puts
538+ in insertions, deletions, and comments, wrapped in spans with
539+ `insertion`, `deletion`, `comment-start`, and `comment-end`
540+ classes, respectively. The author and time of change is
541+ included. `all` is useful for scripting: only accepting changes
542+ from a certain reviewer, say, or before a certain date. This
543+ option only affects the docx reader.
672544
673545`--extract-media=`*DIR*
674546
675547: Extract images and other media contained in or linked from
676548 the source document to the path *DIR*, creating it if
677549 necessary, and adjust the images references in the document
678− so they point to the extracted files. Media are downloaded,
679− read from the file system, or extracted from a binary
680− container (e.g. docx), as needed. The original file paths
681− are used if they are relative paths not containing `..`.
682− Otherwise filenames are constructed from the SHA1 hash of
683− the contents.
550+ so they point to the extracted files. If the source format is
551+ a binary container (docx, epub, or odt), the media is
552+ extracted from the container and the original
553+ filenames are used. Otherwise the media is read from the
554+ file system or downloaded, and new filenames are constructed
555+ based on SHA1 hashes of the contents.
684556
685557`--abbreviations=`*FILE*
686558
@@ -691,30 +563,29 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
691563 system default, use
692564 `pandoc --print-default-data-file=abbreviations`. The only
693565 use pandoc makes of this list is in the Markdown reader.
694− Strings found in this list will be followed by a nonbreaking
695− space, and the period will not produce sentence-ending space
696− in formats like LaTeX. The strings may not contain spaces.
566+ Strings ending in a period that are found in this list will
567+ be followed by a nonbreaking space, so that the period will
568+ not produce sentence-ending space in formats like LaTeX.
697569
698570[`pandocfilters`]: https://github.com/jgm/pandocfilters
699571[PHP]: https://github.com/vinai/pandocfilters-php
700572[perl]: https://metacpan.org/pod/Pandoc::Filter
701573[JavaScript/node.js]: https://github.com/mvhenderson/pandoc-filter-node
702−[Lua filters documentation]: https://pandoc.org/lua-filters.html
703574
704−## General writer options {.options}
575+General writer options
576+----------------------
705577
706578`-s`, `--standalone`
707579
708580: Produce output with an appropriate header and footer (e.g. a
709581 standalone HTML, LaTeX, TEI, or RTF file, not a fragment). This option
710582 is set automatically for `pdf`, `epub`, `epub3`, `fb2`, `docx`, and `odt`
711− output. For `native` output, this option causes metadata to
712− be included; otherwise, metadata is suppressed.
583+ output.
713584
714−`--template=`*FILE*|*URL*
585+`--template=`*FILE*
715586
716−: Use the specified file as a custom template for the generated document.
717− Implies `--standalone`. See [Templates], below, for a description
587+: Use *FILE* as a custom template for the generated document. Implies
588+ `--standalone`. See [Templates], below, for a description
718589 of template syntax. If no extension is specified, an extension
719590 corresponding to the writer will be added, so that `--template=special`
720591 looks for `special.html` for HTML output. If the template is not
@@ -726,29 +597,22 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
726597`-V` *KEY*[`=`*VAL*], `--variable=`*KEY*[`:`*VAL*]
727598
728599: Set the template variable *KEY* to the value *VAL* when rendering the
729− document in standalone mode. If no *VAL* is specified, the
730− key will be given the value `true`.
600+ document in standalone mode. This is generally only useful when the
601+ `--template` option is used to specify a custom template, since
602+ pandoc automatically sets the variables used in the default
603+ templates. If no *VAL* is specified, the key will be given the
604+ value `true`.
731605
732606`-D` *FORMAT*, `--print-default-template=`*FORMAT*
733607
734608: Print the system default template for an output *FORMAT*. (See `-t`
735609 for a list of possible *FORMAT*s.) Templates in the user data
736− directory are ignored. This option may be used with
737− `-o`/`--output` to redirect output to a file, but
738− `-o`/`--output` must come before `--print-default-template`
739− on the command line.
740−
741− Note that some of the default templates use partials, for
742− example `styles.html`. To print the partials, use
743− `--print-default-data-file`: for example,
744− `--print-default-data-file=templates/styles.html`.
610+ directory are ignored.
745611
746612`--print-default-data-file=`*FILE*
747613
748614: Print a system default data file. Files in the user data directory
749− are ignored. This option may be used with `-o`/`--output` to
750− redirect output to a file, but `-o`/`--output` must come before
751− `--print-default-data-file` on the command line.
615+ are ignored.
752616
753617`--eol=crlf`|`lf`|`native`
754618
@@ -759,12 +623,9 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
759623
760624`--dpi`=*NUMBER*
761625
762−: Specify the default dpi (dots per inch) value for conversion
763− from pixels to inch/centimeters and vice versa. (Technically,
764− the correct term would be ppi: pixels per inch.) The default
765− is 96dpi. When images contain information about dpi
766− internally, the encoded value is used instead of the default
767− specified by this option.
626+: Specify the dpi (dots per inch) value for conversion from pixels
627+ to inch/centimeters and vice versa. The default is 96dpi.
628+ Technically, the correct term would be ppi (pixels per inch).
768629
769630`--wrap=auto`|`none`|`preserve`
770631
@@ -777,8 +638,6 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
777638 where there are nonsemantic newlines in the source, there
778639 will be nonsemantic newlines in the output as well).
779640 Automatic wrapping does not currently work in HTML output.
780− In `ipynb` output, this option affects wrapping of the
781− contents of markdown cells.
782641
783642`--columns=`*NUMBER*
784643
@@ -791,21 +650,14 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
791650: Include an automatically generated table of contents (or, in
792651 the case of `latex`, `context`, `docx`, `odt`,
793652 `opendocument`, `rst`, or `ms`, an instruction to create
794− one) in the output document. This option has no effect
795− unless `-s/--standalone` is used, and it has no effect
796− on `man`, `docbook4`, `docbook5`, or `jats` output.
797−
798− Note that if you are producing a PDF via `ms`, the table
799− of contents will appear at the beginning of the
800− document, before the title. If you would prefer it to
801− be at the end of the document, use the option
802− `--pdf-engine-opt=--no-toc-relocation`.
653+ one) in the output document. This option has no effect on
654+ `man`, `docbook4`, `docbook5`, or `jats` output.
803655
804656`--toc-depth=`*NUMBER*
805657
806658: Specify the number of section levels to include in the table
807− of contents. The default is 3 (which means that level-1, 2, and 3
808− headings will be listed in the contents).
659+ of contents. The default is 3 (which means that level 1, 2, and 3
660+ headers will be listed in the contents).
809661
810662`--strip-comments`
811663
@@ -841,10 +693,7 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
841693
842694: Prints a JSON version of a highlighting style, which can
843695 be modified, saved with a `.theme` extension, and used
844− with `--highlight-style`. This option may be used with
845− `-o`/`--output` to redirect output to a file, but
846− `-o`/`--output` must come before `--print-highlight-style`
847− on the command line.
696+ with `--highlight-style`.
848697
849698`--syntax-definition=`*FILE*
850699
@@ -852,10 +701,9 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
852701 which will be used for syntax highlighting of appropriately
853702 marked code blocks. This can be used to add support for
854703 new languages or to use altered syntax definitions for
855− existing languages. This option may be repeated to add
856− multiple syntax definitions.
704+ existing languages.
857705
858−`-H` *FILE*, `--include-in-header=`*FILE*|*URL*
706+`-H` *FILE*, `--include-in-header=`*FILE*
859707
860708: Include contents of *FILE*, verbatim, at the end of the header.
861709 This can be used, for example, to include special
@@ -863,7 +711,7 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
863711 repeatedly to include multiple files in the header. They will be
864712 included in the order specified. Implies `--standalone`.
865713
866−`-B` *FILE*, `--include-before-body=`*FILE*|*URL*
714+`-B` *FILE*, `--include-before-body=`*FILE*
867715
868716: Include contents of *FILE*, verbatim, at the beginning of the
869717 document body (e.g. after the `<body>` tag in HTML, or the
@@ -872,7 +720,7 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
872720 used repeatedly to include multiple files. They will be included in
873721 the order specified. Implies `--standalone`.
874722
875−`-A` *FILE*, `--include-after-body=`*FILE*|*URL*
723+`-A` *FILE*, `--include-after-body=`*FILE*
876724
877725: Include contents of *FILE*, verbatim, at the end of the document
878726 body (before the `</body>` tag in HTML, or the
@@ -891,39 +739,28 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
891739 will not be searched. For example:
892740 `--resource-path=.:test` will search the working directory
893741 and the `test` subdirectory, in that order.
894− This option can be used repeatedly. Search path components
895− that come later on the command line will be searched before
896− those that come earlier, so
897− `--resource-path foo:bar --resource-path baz:bim` is
898− equivalent to `--resource-path baz:bim:foo:bar`.
899742
900743`--request-header=`*NAME*`:`*VAL*
901744
902745: Set the request header *NAME* to the value *VAL* when making
903746 HTTP requests (for example, when a URL is given on the
904747 command line, or when resources used in a document must be
905− downloaded). If you're behind a proxy, you also need to set
906− the environment variable `http_proxy` to `http://...`.
748+ downloaded).
907749
908−`--no-check-certificate`
909−
910−: Disable the certificate verification to allow access to
911− unsecure HTTP resources (for example when the certificate
912− is no longer valid or self signed).
913−
914−## Options affecting specific writers {.options}
750+Options affecting specific writers
751+----------------------------------
915752
916753`--self-contained`
917754
918755: Produce a standalone HTML file with no external dependencies, using
919756 `data:` URIs to incorporate the contents of linked scripts, stylesheets,
920− images, and videos. Implies `--standalone`. The resulting file should be
921− "self-contained," in the sense that it needs no external files and no net
922− access to be displayed properly by a browser. This option works only with
923− HTML output formats, including `html4`, `html5`, `html+lhs`, `html5+lhs`,
924− `s5`, `slidy`, `slideous`, `dzslides`, and `revealjs`. Scripts, images,
925− and stylesheets at absolute URLs will be downloaded; those at relative
926− URLs will be sought relative to the working directory (if the first source
757+ images, and videos. The resulting file should be "self-contained,"
758+ in the sense that it needs no external files and no net access to be
759+ displayed properly by a browser. This option works only with HTML output
760+ formats, including `html4`, `html5`, `html+lhs`, `html5+lhs`, `s5`,
761+ `slidy`, `slideous`, `dzslides`, and `revealjs`. Scripts, images, and
762+ stylesheets at absolute URLs will be downloaded; those at relative URLs
763+ will be sought relative to the working directory (if the first source
927764 file is local) or relative to the base URL (if the first source
928765 file is remote). Elements with the attribute
929766 `data-external="1"` will be left alone; the documents they
@@ -936,18 +773,13 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
936773
937774`--html-q-tags`
938775
939−: Use `<q>` tags for quotes in HTML. (This option only has an
940− effect if the `smart` extension is enabled for the input
941− format used.)
776+: Use `<q>` tags for quotes in HTML.
942777
943778`--ascii`
944779
945−: Use only ASCII characters in output. Currently supported for XML
946− and HTML formats (which use entities instead of UTF-8 when this
947− option is selected), CommonMark, gfm, and Markdown (which use
948− entities), roff ms (which use hexadecimal escapes), and to a
949− limited degree LaTeX (which uses standard commands for accented
950− characters when possible). roff man output uses ASCII by default.
780+: Use only ASCII characters in output. Currently supported only for
781+ HTML and DocBook output (which uses numerical entities instead of
782+ UTF-8 when this option is selected).
951783
952784`--reference-links`
953785
@@ -956,45 +788,36 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
956788 placement of link references is affected by the
957789 `--reference-location` option.
958790
959−`--reference-location=block`|`section`|`document`
791+`--reference-location = block`|`section`|`document`
960792
961793: Specify whether footnotes (and references, if `reference-links` is
962794 set) are placed at the end of the current (top-level) block, the
963795 current section, or the document. The default is
964796 `document`. Currently only affects the markdown writer.
965797
966−`--markdown-headings=setext`|`atx`
967−
968−: Specify whether to use ATX-style (`#`-prefixed) or
969− Setext-style (underlined) headings for level 1 and 2
970− headings in Markdown output. (The default is `atx`.)
971− ATX-style headings are always used for levels 3+.
972− This option also affects Markdown cells in `ipynb` output.
973−
974798`--atx-headers`
975799
976−: *Deprecated synonym for `--markdown-headings=atx`.*
800+: Use ATX-style headers in Markdown and AsciiDoc output. The default is
801+ to use setext-style headers for levels 1-2, and then ATX headers.
802+ (Note: for `gfm` output, ATX headers are always used.)
977803
978−`--top-level-division=default`|`section`|`chapter`|`part`
804+`--top-level-division=[default|section|chapter|part]`
979805
980−: Treat top-level headings as the given division type in
981− LaTeX, ConTeXt, DocBook, and TEI output. The hierarchy
982− order is part, chapter, then section; all headings are
983− shifted such that the top-level heading becomes the
984− specified type. The default behavior is to determine the
985− best division type via heuristics: unless other conditions
986− apply, `section` is chosen. When the `documentclass`
987− variable is set to `report`, `book`, or `memoir` (unless the
988− `article` option is specified), `chapter` is implied as the
989− setting for this option. If `beamer` is the output format,
990− specifying either `chapter` or `part` will cause top-level
991− headings to become `\part{..}`, while second-level headings
992− remain as their default type.
806+: Treat top-level headers as the given division type in LaTeX, ConTeXt,
807+ DocBook, and TEI output. The hierarchy order is part, chapter, then section;
808+ all headers are shifted such that the top-level header becomes the specified
809+ type. The default behavior is to determine the best division type via
810+ heuristics: unless other conditions apply, `section` is chosen. When the
811+ LaTeX document class is set to `report`, `book`, or `memoir` (unless the
812+ `article` option is specified), `chapter` is implied as the setting for this
813+ option. If `beamer` is the output format, specifying either `chapter` or
814+ `part` will cause top-level headers to become `\part{..}`, while
815+ second-level headers remain as their default type.
993816
994817`-N`, `--number-sections`
995818
996−: Number section headings in LaTeX, ConTeXt, HTML, Docx, ms, or EPUB
997− output. By default, sections are not numbered. Sections with class
819+: Number section headings in LaTeX, ConTeXt, HTML, or EPUB output.
820+ By default, sections are not numbered. Sections with class
998821 `unnumbered` will never be numbered, even if `--number-sections`
999822 is specified.
1000823
@@ -1002,19 +825,16 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
1002825
1003826: Offset for section headings in HTML output (ignored in other
1004827 output formats). The first number is added to the section number for
1005− top-level headings, the second for second-level headings, and so on.
1006− So, for example, if you want the first top-level heading in your
828+ top-level headers, the second for second-level headers, and so on.
829+ So, for example, if you want the first top-level header in your
1007830 document to be numbered "6", specify `--number-offset=5`.
1008− If your document starts with a level-2 heading which you want to
831+ If your document starts with a level-2 header which you want to
1009832 be numbered "1.5", specify `--number-offset=1,4`.
1010833 Offsets are 0 by default. Implies `--number-sections`.
1011834
1012835`--listings`
1013836
1014−: Use the [`listings`] package for LaTeX code blocks. The package
1015− does not support multi-byte encoding for source code. To handle UTF-8
1016− you would need to use a custom template. This issue is fully
1017− documented here: [Encoding issue with the listings package].
837+: Use the [`listings`] package for LaTeX code blocks
1018838
1019839`-i`, `--incremental`
1020840
@@ -1023,12 +843,12 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
1023843
1024844`--slide-level=`*NUMBER*
1025845
1026−: Specifies that headings with the specified level create
1027− slides (for `beamer`, `s5`, `slidy`, `slideous`, `dzslides`). Headings
846+: Specifies that headers with the specified level create
847+ slides (for `beamer`, `s5`, `slidy`, `slideous`, `dzslides`). Headers
1028848 above this level in the hierarchy are used to divide the
1029− slide show into sections; headings below this level create
849+ slide show into sections; headers below this level create
1030850 subheads within a slide. Note that content that is
1031− not contained under slide-level headings will not appear in
851+ not contained under slide-level headers will not appear in
1032852 the slide show. The default is to set the slide level based
1033853 on the contents of the document; see [Structuring the slide
1034854 show].
@@ -1037,8 +857,8 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
1037857
1038858: Wrap sections in `<section>` tags (or `<div>` tags for `html4`),
1039859 and attach identifiers to the enclosing `<section>` (or `<div>`)
1040− rather than the heading itself. See
1041− [Heading identifiers], below.
860+ rather than the header itself. See
861+ [Header identifiers], below.
1042862
1043863`--email-obfuscation=none`|`javascript`|`references`
1044864
@@ -1059,7 +879,8 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
1059879
1060880: Specify *STRING* as a prefix at the beginning of the title
1061881 that appears in the HTML header (but not in the title as it
1062− appears at the beginning of the HTML body). Implies `--standalone`.
882+ appears at the beginning of the HTML body). Implies
883+ `--standalone`.
1063884
1064885`-c` *URL*, `--css=`*URL*
1065886
@@ -1067,8 +888,8 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
1067888 include multiple files. They will be included in the order specified.
1068889
1069890 A stylesheet is required for generating EPUB. If none is
1070− provided using this option (or the `css` or `stylesheet`
1071− metadata fields), pandoc will look for a file `epub.css` in the
891+ provided using this option (or the `stylesheet` metadata
892+ field), pandoc will look for a file `epub.css` in the
1072893 user data directory (see `--data-dir`). If it is not
1073894 found there, sensible defaults will be used.
1074895
@@ -1091,56 +912,20 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
1091912
1092913 To produce a custom `reference.docx`, first get a copy of
1093914 the default `reference.docx`: `pandoc
1094− -o custom-reference.docx --print-default-data-file reference.docx`.
1095− Then open `custom-reference.docx` in Word, modify the
1096− styles as you wish, and save the file. For best
1097− results, do not make changes to this file other than
1098− modifying the styles used by pandoc:
1099−
1100− Paragraph styles:
1101−
1102− - Normal
1103− - Body Text
1104− - First Paragraph
1105− - Compact
1106− - Title
1107− - Subtitle
1108− - Author
1109− - Date
1110− - Abstract
1111− - Bibliography
1112− - Heading 1
1113− - Heading 2
1114− - Heading 3
1115− - Heading 4
1116− - Heading 5
1117− - Heading 6
1118− - Heading 7
1119− - Heading 8
1120− - Heading 9
1121− - Block Text
1122− - Footnote Text
1123− - Definition Term
1124− - Definition
1125− - Caption
1126− - Table Caption
1127− - Image Caption
1128− - Figure
1129− - Captioned Figure
1130− - TOC Heading
1131−
1132− Character styles:
1133−
1134− - Default Paragraph Font
1135− - Body Text Char
1136− - Verbatim Char
1137− - Footnote Reference
1138− - Hyperlink
1139− - Section Number
1140−
1141− Table style:
1142−
1143− - Table
915+ --print-default-data-file reference.docx >
916+ custom-reference.docx`. Then open `custom-reference.docx`
917+ in Word, modify the styles as you wish, and save the file.
918+ For best results, do not make changes to this file other
919+ than modifying the styles used by pandoc: [paragraph]
920+ Normal, Body Text, First Paragraph, Compact, Title,
921+ Subtitle, Author, Date, Abstract, Bibliography, Heading 1,
922+ Heading 2, Heading 3, Heading 4, Heading 5, Heading 6,
923+ Heading 7, Heading 8, Heading 9, Block Text, Footnote Text,
924+ Definition Term, Definition, Caption, Table Caption,
925+ Image Caption, Figure, Captioned Figure, TOC Heading;
926+ [character] Default Paragraph Font, Body Text Char,
927+ Verbatim Char, Footnote Reference, Hyperlink; [table]
928+ Table.
1144929
1145930 ODT
1146931
@@ -1154,33 +939,10 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
1154939
1155940 To produce a custom `reference.odt`, first get a copy of
1156941 the default `reference.odt`: `pandoc
1157− -o custom-reference.odt --print-default-data-file reference.odt`.
1158− Then open `custom-reference.odt` in LibreOffice, modify
1159− the styles as you wish, and save the file.
1160−
1161− PowerPoint
1162−
1163− : Templates included with Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 (either with
1164− `.pptx` or `.potx` extension) are known to work, as are most
1165− templates derived from these.
1166−
1167− The specific requirement is that the template should begin with
1168− the following first four layouts:
1169−
1170− 1. Title Slide
1171− 2. Title and Content
1172− 3. Section Header
1173− 4. Two Content
1174−
1175− All templates included with a recent version of MS PowerPoint
1176− will fit these criteria. (You can click on `Layout` under the
1177− `Home` menu to check.)
1178−
1179− You can also modify the default `reference.pptx`: first run
1180− `pandoc -o custom-reference.pptx --print-default-data-file
1181− reference.pptx`, and then modify `custom-reference.pptx`
1182− in MS PowerPoint (pandoc will use the first four layout
1183− slides, as mentioned above).
942+ --print-default-data-file reference.odt >
943+ custom-reference.odt`. Then open `custom-reference.odt` in
944+ LibreOffice, modify the styles as you wish, and save the
945+ file.
1184946
1185947`--epub-cover-image=`*FILE*
1186948
@@ -1248,12 +1010,12 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
12481010
12491011`--epub-chapter-level=`*NUMBER*
12501012
1251−: Specify the heading level at which to split the EPUB into separate
1252− "chapter" files. The default is to split into chapters at level-1
1253− headings. This option only affects the internal composition of the
1013+: Specify the header level at which to split the EPUB into separate
1014+ "chapter" files. The default is to split into chapters at level 1
1015+ headers. This option only affects the internal composition of the
12541016 EPUB, not the way chapters and sections are displayed to users. Some
12551017 readers may be slow if the chapter files are too large, so for large
1256− documents with few level-1 headings, one might want to use a chapter
1018+ documents with few level 1 headers, one might want to use a chapter
12571019 level of 2 or 3.
12581020
12591021`--epub-subdirectory=`*DIRNAME*
@@ -1262,118 +1024,69 @@ header when requesting a document from a URL:
12621024 the EPUB-specific contents. The default is `EPUB`. To put
12631025 the EPUB contents in the top level, use an empty string.
12641026
1265−`--ipynb-output=all|none|best`
1266−
1267−: Determines how ipynb output cells are treated. `all` means
1268− that all of the data formats included in the original are
1269− preserved. `none` means that the contents of data cells
1270− are omitted. `best` causes pandoc to try to pick the
1271− richest data block in each output cell that is compatible
1272− with the output format. The default is `best`.
1273−
1274−`--pdf-engine=`*PROGRAM*
1027+`--pdf-engine=pdflatex`|`lualatex`|`xelatex`|`wkhtmltopdf`|`weasyprint`|`prince`|`context`|`pdfroff`
12751028
12761029: Use the specified engine when producing PDF output.
1277− Valid values are `pdflatex`, `lualatex`, `xelatex`, `latexmk`,
1278− `tectonic`, `wkhtmltopdf`, `weasyprint`, `prince`, `context`,
1279− and `pdfroff`. If the engine is not in your PATH, the full
1280− path of the engine may be specified here. If this option
1281− is not specified, pandoc uses the following defaults
1282− depending on the output format specified using `-t/--to`:
1283−
1284− - `-t latex` or none: `pdflatex` (other options: `xelatex`, `lualatex`,
1285− `tectonic`, `latexmk`)
1286− - `-t context`: `context`
1287− - `-t html`: `wkhtmltopdf` (other options: `prince`, `weasyprint`;
1288− see [print-css.rocks](https://print-css.rocks) for a good
1289− introduction to PDF generation from HTML/CSS.)
1290− - `-t ms`: `pdfroff`
1030+ The default is `pdflatex`. If the engine is not in your PATH,
1031+ the full path of the engine may be specified here.
12911032
12921033`--pdf-engine-opt=`*STRING*
12931034
12941035: Use the given string as a command-line argument to the `pdf-engine`.
1295− For example, to use a persistent directory `foo` for `latexmk`'s
1296− auxiliary files, use `--pdf-engine-opt=-outdir=foo`.
1297− Note that no check for duplicate options is done.
1298−
1299−[Dublin Core elements]: https://www.dublincore.org/specifications/dublin-core/dces/
1300−[ISO 8601 format]: https://www.w3.org/TR/NOTE-datetime
1301−[Encoding issue with the listings package]:
1302− https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX/Source_Code_Listings#Encoding_issue
1303−
1304−## Citation rendering {.options}
1305−
1306−`-C`, `--citeproc`
1307−
1308−: Process the citations in the file, replacing them with
1309− rendered citations and adding a bibliography.
1310− Citation processing will not take place unless bibliographic
1311− data is supplied, either through an external file specified
1312− using the `--bibliography` option or the `bibliography`
1313− field in metadata, or via a `references` section in metadata
1314− containing a list of citations in CSL YAML format with
1315− Markdown formatting. The style is controlled by a [CSL]
1316− stylesheet specified using the `--csl` option or the `csl`
1317− field in metadata. (If no stylesheet is specified,
1318− the `chicago-author-date` style will be used by default.)
1319− The citation processing transformation may be applied before
1320− or after filters or Lua filters (see `--filter`,
1321− `--lua-filter`): these transformations are applied in the
1322− order they appear on the command line. For more
1323− information, see the section on [Citations].
1036+ If used multiple times, the arguments are provided with spaces between
1037+ them. Note that no check for duplicate options is done.
1038+
1039+[Dublin Core elements]: http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/
1040+[ISO 8601 format]: http://www.w3.org/TR/NOTE-datetime
1041+
1042+Citation rendering
1043+------------------
13241044
13251045`--bibliography=`*FILE*
13261046
13271047: Set the `bibliography` field in the document's metadata to *FILE*,
1328− overriding any value set in the metadata. If you supply
1329− this argument multiple times, each *FILE* will be added to
1330− bibliography. If *FILE* is a URL, it will be fetched
1331− via HTTP. If *FILE* is not found relative to the
1332− working directory, it will be sought in the resource path
1333− (see `--resource-path`).
1048+ overriding any value set in the metadata, and process citations
1049+ using `pandoc-citeproc`. (This is equivalent to
1050+ `--metadata bibliography=FILE --filter pandoc-citeproc`.)
1051+ If `--natbib` or `--biblatex` is also supplied, `pandoc-citeproc` is not
1052+ used, making this equivalent to `--metadata bibliography=FILE`.
1053+ If you supply this argument multiple times, each *FILE* will be added
1054+ to bibliography.
13341055
13351056`--csl=`*FILE*
13361057
13371058: Set the `csl` field in the document's metadata to *FILE*,
13381059 overriding any value set in the metadata. (This is equivalent to
1339− `--metadata csl=FILE`.) If *FILE* is a URL, it will be
1340− fetched via HTTP. If *FILE* is not found relative to the
1341− working directory, it will be sought in the resource path
1342− (see `--resource-path`) and finally in the `csl`
1343− subdirectory of the pandoc user data directory.
1060+ `--metadata csl=FILE`.)
1061+ This option is only relevant with `pandoc-citeproc`.
13441062
13451063`--citation-abbreviations=`*FILE*
13461064
13471065: Set the `citation-abbreviations` field in the document's metadata to
13481066 *FILE*, overriding any value set in the metadata. (This is equivalent to
13491067 `--metadata citation-abbreviations=FILE`.)
1350− If *FILE* is a URL, it will be fetched via HTTP. If *FILE* is not
1351− found relative to the working directory, it will be sought
1352− in the resource path (see `--resource-path`) and finally in
1353− the `csl` subdirectory of the pandoc user data directory.
1068+ This option is only relevant with `pandoc-citeproc`.
13541069
13551070`--natbib`
13561071
1357−: Use [`natbib`] for citations in LaTeX output. This option
1358− is not for use with the `--citeproc` option or with PDF
1359− output. It is intended for use in producing a LaTeX file
1360− that can be processed with [`bibtex`].
1072+: Use [`natbib`] for citations in LaTeX output. This option is not for use
1073+ with the `pandoc-citeproc` filter or with PDF output. It is intended for
1074+ use in producing a LaTeX file that can be processed with [`bibtex`].
13611075
13621076`--biblatex`
13631077
1364−: Use [`biblatex`] for citations in LaTeX output. This option
1365− is not for use with the `--citeproc` option or with PDF
1366− output. It is intended for use in producing a LaTeX file
1367− that can be processed with [`bibtex`] or [`biber`].
1078+: Use [`biblatex`] for citations in LaTeX output. This option is not for use
1079+ with the `pandoc-citeproc` filter or with PDF output. It is intended for
1080+ use in producing a LaTeX file that can be processed with [`bibtex`] or [`biber`].
13681081
1369−## Math rendering in HTML {.options}
1082+Math rendering in HTML
1083+----------------------
13701084
1371−The default is to render TeX math as far as possible using
1372−Unicode characters. Formulas are put inside a `span` with
1373−`class="math"`, so that they may be styled differently from the
1374−surrounding text if needed. However, this gives acceptable
1375−results only for basic math, usually you will want to use
1376−`--mathjax` or another of the following options.
1085+The default is to render TeX math as far as possible using Unicode characters.
1086+Formulas are put inside a `span` with `class="math"`, so that they may be styled
1087+differently from the surrounding text if needed. However, this gives acceptable
1088+results only for basic math, usually you will want to use `--mathjax` or another
1089+of the following options.
13771090
13781091`--mathjax`[`=`*URL*]
13791092
@@ -1387,11 +1100,10 @@ results only for basic math, usually you will want to use
13871100
13881101`--mathml`
13891102
1390−: Convert TeX math to [MathML] (in `epub3`, `docbook4`,
1391− `docbook5`, `jats`, `html4` and `html5`). This is the
1392− default in `odt` output. Note that currently only Firefox
1393− and Safari (and select e-book readers) natively support
1394− MathML.
1103+: Convert TeX math to [MathML] (in `epub3`, `docbook4`, `docbook5`, `jats`,
1104+ `html4` and `html5`). This is the default in `odt` output. Note that
1105+ currently only Firefox and Safari (and select e-book readers) natively
1106+ support MathML.
13951107
13961108`--webtex`[`=`*URL*]
13971109
@@ -1408,26 +1120,67 @@ results only for basic math, usually you will want to use
14081120`--katex`[`=`*URL*]
14091121
14101122: Use [KaTeX] to display embedded TeX math in HTML output.
1411− The *URL* is the base URL for the KaTeX library. That directory
1412− should contain a `katex.min.js` and a `katex.min.css` file.
1413− If a *URL* is not provided, a link to the KaTeX CDN will be inserted.
1123+ The *URL* is the base URL for the KaTeX library. If a *URL* is
1124+ not provided, a link to the KaTeX CDN will be inserted.
1125+
1126+`--katex-stylesheet=`*URL*
1127+
1128+: The *URL* should point to the `katex.css` stylesheet. If this option is
1129+ not specified, a link to the KaTeX CDN will be inserted. Note that this
1130+ option does not imply `--katex`.
1131+
1132+`-m` [*URL*], `--latexmathml`[`=`*URL*]
1133+
1134+: *Deprecated.*
1135+ Use the [LaTeXMathML] script to display embedded TeX math in HTML output.
1136+ TeX math will be displayed between `$` or `$$` characters and put in
1137+ `<span>` tags with class `LaTeX`. The LaTeXMathML JavaScript will then
1138+ change it to MathML. Note that currently only Firefox and Safari
1139+ (and select e-book readers) natively support MathML.
1140+ To insert a link the `LaTeXMathML.js` script, provide a *URL*.
1141+
1142+`--jsmath`[`=`*URL*]
1143+
1144+: *Deprecated.*
1145+ Use [jsMath] (the predecessor of MathJax) to display embedded TeX
1146+ math in HTML output. TeX math will be put inside `<span>` tags
1147+ (for inline math) or `<div>` tags (for display math) with class
1148+ `math` and rendered by the jsMath script. The *URL* should point to
1149+ the script (e.g. `jsMath/easy/load.js`); if provided, it will be linked
1150+ to in the header of standalone HTML documents. If a *URL* is not provided,
1151+ no link to the jsMath load script will be inserted; it is then
1152+ up to the author to provide such a link in the HTML template.
14141153
14151154`--gladtex`
14161155
1417−: Enclose TeX math in `<eq>` tags in HTML output. The resulting HTML
1418− can then be processed by [GladTeX] to produce SVG images of the typeset
1419− formulas and an HTML file with these images embedded.
1156+: *Deprecated.*
1157+ Enclose TeX math in `<eq>` tags in HTML output. The resulting HTML
1158+ can then be processed by [gladTeX] to produce images of the typeset
1159+ formulas and an HTML file with links to these images.
1160+ So, the procedure is:
14201161
14211162 pandoc -s --gladtex input.md -o myfile.htex
1422− gladtex -d image_dir myfile.htex
1423− # produces myfile.html and images in image_dir
1163+ gladtex -d myfile-images myfile.htex
1164+ # produces myfile.html and images in myfile-images
14241165
1425−[MathML]: https://www.w3.org/Math/
1166+`--mimetex`[`=`*URL*]
1167+
1168+: *Deprecated.*
1169+ Render TeX math using the [mimeTeX] CGI script, which generates an
1170+ image for each TeX formula. This should work in all browsers. If
1171+ *URL* is not specified, it is assumed that the script is at
1172+ `/cgi-bin/mimetex.cgi`.
1173+
1174+[MathML]: http://www.w3.org/Math/
1175+[LaTeXMathML]: http://math.etsu.edu/LaTeXMathML/
1176+[jsMath]: http://www.math.union.edu/~dpvc/jsmath/
14261177[MathJax]: https://www.mathjax.org
1178+[gladTeX]: http://ans.hsh.no/home/mgg/gladtex/
1179+[mimeTeX]: http://www.forkosh.com/mimetex.html
14271180[KaTeX]: https://github.com/Khan/KaTeX
1428−[GladTeX]: https://humenda.github.io/GladTeX/
14291181
1430−## Options for wrapper scripts {.options}
1182+Options for wrapper scripts
1183+---------------------------
14311184
14321185`--dump-args`
14331186
@@ -1451,277 +1204,8 @@ results only for basic math, usually you will want to use
14511204
14521205 pandoc -o foo.html -s
14531206
1454−# Exit codes
1455−
1456−If pandoc completes successfully, it will return exit code 0.
1457−Nonzero exit codes have the following meanings:
1458−
1459− Code Error
1460−----- ------------------------------------
1461− 3 PandocFailOnWarningError
1462− 4 PandocAppError
1463− 5 PandocTemplateError
1464− 6 PandocOptionError
1465− 21 PandocUnknownReaderError
1466− 22 PandocUnknownWriterError
1467− 23 PandocUnsupportedExtensionError
1468− 24 PandocCiteprocError
1469− 31 PandocEpubSubdirectoryError
1470− 43 PandocPDFError
1471− 44 PandocXMLError
1472− 47 PandocPDFProgramNotFoundError
1473− 61 PandocHttpError
1474− 62 PandocShouldNeverHappenError
1475− 63 PandocSomeError
1476− 64 PandocParseError
1477− 65 PandocParsecError
1478− 66 PandocMakePDFError
1479− 67 PandocSyntaxMapError
1480− 83 PandocFilterError
1481− 91 PandocMacroLoop
1482− 92 PandocUTF8DecodingError
1483− 93 PandocIpynbDecodingError
1484− 94 PandocUnsupportedCharsetError
1485− 97 PandocCouldNotFindDataFileError
1486− 99 PandocResourceNotFound
1487−----- ------------------------------------
1488−
1489−# Default files
1490−
1491−The `--defaults` option may be used to specify a package
1492−of options. Here is a sample defaults file demonstrating all of
1493−the fields that may be used:
1494−
1495−``` yaml
1496−from: markdown+emoji
1497−# reader: may be used instead of from:
1498−to: html5
1499−# writer: may be used instead of to:
1500−
1501−# leave blank for output to stdout:
1502−output-file:
1503−# leave blank for input from stdin, use [] for no input:
1504−input-files:
1505−- preface.md
1506−- content.md
1507−# or you may use input-file: with a single value
1508−
1509−# Include options from the specified defaults files.
1510−# The files will be searched for first in the working directory
1511−# and then in the defaults subdirectory of the user data directory.
1512−# The files are included in the same order in which they appear in
1513−# the list. Options specified in this defaults file always have
1514−# priority over the included ones.
1515−defaults:
1516−- defsA
1517−- defsB
1518−
1519−template: letter
1520−standalone: true
1521−self-contained: false
1522−
1523−# note that structured variables may be specified:
1524−variables:
1525− documentclass: book
1526− classoption:
1527− - twosides
1528− - draft
1529−
1530−# metadata values specified here are parsed as literal
1531−# string text, not markdown:
1532−metadata:
1533− author:
1534− - Sam Smith
1535− - Julie Liu
1536−metadata-files:
1537−- boilerplate.yaml
1538−# or you may use metadata-file: with a single value
1539−
1540−# Note that these take files, not their contents:
1541−include-before-body: []
1542−include-after-body: []
1543−include-in-header: []
1544−resource-path: ["."]
1545−
1546−# turn on built-in citation processing. Note that if you need
1547−# control over when the citeproc processing is done relative
1548−# to other filters, you should instead use `citeproc` in the
1549−# list of `filters` (see below).
1550−citeproc: true
1551−csl: ieee
1552−bibliography:
1553−- foobar.bib
1554−- barbaz.json
1555−citation-abbreviations: abbrevs.json
1556−
1557−# Filters will be assumed to be Lua filters if they have
1558−# the .lua extension, and json filters otherwise. But
1559−# the filter type can also be specified explicitly, as shown.
1560−# Filters are run in the order specified.
1561−# To include the built-in citeproc filter, use either `citeproc`
1562−# or `{type: citeproc}`.
1563−filters:
1564−- wordcount.lua
1565−- type: json
1566− path: foo.lua
1567−
1568−file-scope: false
1569−
1570−data-dir:
1571−
1572−# ERROR, WARNING, or INFO
1573−verbosity: INFO
1574−log-file: log.json
1575−
1576−# citeproc, natbib, or biblatex. This only affects LaTeX
1577−# output. If you want to use citeproc to format citations,
1578−# you should also set 'citeproc: true' (see above).
1579−cite-method: citeproc
1580−
1581−# part, chapter, section, or default:
1582−top-level-division: chapter
1583−abbreviations:
1584−
1585−pdf-engine: pdflatex
1586−pdf-engine-opts:
1587−- "-shell-escape"
1588−# you may also use pdf-engine-opt: with a single option
1589−# pdf-engine-opt: "-shell-escape"
1590−
1591−# auto, preserve, or none
1592−wrap: auto
1593−columns: 78
1594−dpi: 72
1595−
1596−extract-media: mediadir
1597−
1598−table-of-contents: true
1599−toc-depth: 2
1600−number-sections: false
1601−# a list of offsets at each heading level
1602−number-offset: [0,0,0,0,0,0]
1603−# toc: may also be used instead of table-of-contents:
1604−shift-heading-level-by: 1
1605−section-divs: true
1606−identifier-prefix: foo
1607−title-prefix: ""
1608−strip-empty-paragraphs: true
1609−# lf, crlf, or native
1610−eol: lf
1611−strip-comments: false
1612−indented-code-classes: []
1613−ascii: true
1614−default-image-extension: ".jpg"
1615−
1616−# either a style name of a style definition file:
1617−highlight-style: pygments
1618−syntax-definitions:
1619−- c.xml
1620−# or you may use syntax-definition: with a single value
1621−listings: false
1622−
1623−reference-doc: myref.docx
1624−
1625−# method is plain, webtex, gladtex, mathml, mathjax, katex
1626−# you may specify a url with webtex, mathjax, katex
1627−html-math-method:
1628− method: mathjax
1629− url: "https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/mathjax@3/es5/tex-mml-chtml.js"
1630−# none, references, or javascript
1631−email-obfuscation: javascript
1632−
1633−tab-stop: 8
1634−preserve-tabs: true
1635−
1636−incremental: false
1637−slide-level: 2
1638−
1639−epub-subdirectory: EPUB
1640−epub-metadata: meta.xml
1641−epub-fonts:
1642−- foobar.otf
1643−epub-chapter-level: 1
1644−epub-cover-image: cover.jpg
1645−
1646−reference-links: true
1647−# block, section, or document
1648−reference-location: block
1649−markdown-headings: setext
1650−
1651−# accept, reject, or all
1652−track-changes: accept
1653−
1654−html-q-tags: false
1655−css:
1656−- site.css
1657−
1658−# none, all, or best
1659−ipynb-output: best
1660−
1661−# A list of two-element lists
1662−request-headers:
1663−- ["User-Agent", "Mozilla/5.0"]
1664−
1665−fail-if-warnings: false
1666−dump-args: false
1667−ignore-args: false
1668−trace: false
1669−```
1670−
1671−Fields that are omitted will just have their regular
1672−default values. So a defaults file can be as simple as
1673−one line:
1674−
1675−``` yaml
1676−verbosity: INFO
1677−```
1678−
1679−In fields that expect a file path (or list of file paths), the
1680−following syntax may be used to interpolate environment variables:
1681−
1682−``` yaml
1683−csl: ${HOME}/mycsldir/special.csl
1684−```
1685−
1686−`${USERDATA}` may also be used; this will always resolve to the
1687−user data directory that is current when the defaults file is
1688−parsed, regardless of the setting of the environment
1689−variable `USERDATA`.
1690−
1691−`${.}` will resolve to the directory containing the default
1692−file itself. This allows you to refer to resources contained
1693−in that directory:
1694−
1695−``` yaml
1696−epub-cover-image: ${.}/cover.jpg
1697−epub-metadata: ${.}/meta.xml
1698−resource-path:
1699−- . # the working directory from which pandoc is run
1700−- ${.}/images # the images subdirectory of the directory
1701− # containing this defaults file
1702−```
1703−
1704−This environment variable interpolation syntax *only* works in
1705−fields that expect file paths.
1706−
1707−Default files can be placed in the `defaults` subdirectory of
1708−the user data directory and used from any directory. For
1709−example, one could create a file specifying defaults for writing
1710−letters, save it as `letter.yaml` in the `defaults` subdirectory
1711−of the user data directory, and then invoke these defaults
1712−from any directory using `pandoc --defaults letter`
1713−or `pandoc -dletter`.
1714−
1715−When multiple defaults are used, their contents will be combined.
1716−
1717−Note that, where command-line arguments may be repeated
1718−(`--metadata-file`, `--css`, `--include-in-header`,
1719−`--include-before-body`, `--include-after-body`, `--variable`,
1720−`--metadata`, `--syntax-definition`), the values specified on
1721−the command line will combine with values specified in the
1722−defaults file, rather than replacing them.
1723−
1724−# Templates
1207+Templates
1208+=========
17251209
17261210When the `-s/--standalone` option is used, pandoc uses a template to
17271211add header and footer material that is needed for a self-standing
@@ -1740,3127 +1224,2083 @@ directory (see `--data-dir`, above). *Exceptions:*
17401224- For `pdf` output, customize the `default.latex` template
17411225 (or the `default.context` template, if you use `-t context`,
17421226 or the `default.ms` template, if you use `-t ms`, or the
1743− `default.html` template, if you use `-t html`).
1744−- `docx` and `pptx` have no template (however, you can use
1227+ `default.html5` template, if you use `-t html5`).
1228+- `docx` has no template (however, you can use
17451229 `--reference-doc` to customize the output).
17461230
17471231Templates contain *variables*, which allow for the inclusion of
1748−arbitrary information at any point in the file. They may be set at the
1749−command line using the `-V/--variable` option. If a variable is not set,
1750−pandoc will look for the key in the document's metadata, which can be set
1751−using either [YAML metadata blocks][Extension: `yaml_metadata_block`]
1752−or with the `-M/--metadata` option. In addition, some variables
1753−are given default values by pandoc. See [Variables] below for
1754−a list of variables used in pandoc's default templates.
1232+arbitrary information at any point in the file. Variables may be set
1233+within the document using [YAML metadata blocks][Extension:
1234+`yaml_metadata_block`]. They may also be set at the
1235+command line using the `-V/--variable` option: variables set in this
1236+way override metadata fields with the same name.
17551237
1756−If you use custom templates, you may need to revise them as pandoc
1757−changes. We recommend tracking the changes in the default templates,
1758−and modifying your custom templates accordingly. An easy way to do this
1759−is to fork the [pandoc-templates] repository and merge in
1760−changes after each pandoc release.
1761−
1762− [pandoc-templates]: https://github.com/jgm/pandoc-templates
1238+Variables set by pandoc
1239+-----------------------
17631240
1764−## Template syntax
1241+Some variables are set automatically by pandoc. These vary somewhat
1242+depending on the output format, but include metadata fields as well
1243+as the following:
17651244
1766−### Comments
1245+`sourcefile`, `outputfile`
1246+: source and destination filenames, as given on the command line.
1247+ `sourcefile` can also be a list if input comes from multiple files, or empty
1248+ if input is from stdin. You can use the following snippet in your template
1249+ to distinguish them:
17671250
1768−Anything between the sequence `$--` and the end of the
1769−line will be treated as a comment and omitted from the output.
1251+ $if(sourcefile)$
1252+ $for(sourcefile)$
1253+ $sourcefile$
1254+ $endfor$
1255+ $else$
1256+ (stdin)
1257+ $endif$
17701258
1771−### Delimiters
1259+ Similarly, `outputfile` can be `-` if output goes to the terminal.
17721260
1773−To mark variables and control structures in the template,
1774−either `$`...`$` or `${`...`}` may be used as delimiters.
1775−The styles may also be mixed in the same template, but the
1776−opening and closing delimiter must match in each case. The
1777−opening delimiter may be followed by one or more spaces
1778−or tabs, which will be ignored. The closing delimiter may
1779−be followed by one or more spaces or tabs, which will be
1780−ignored.
1261+`title`, `author`, `date`
1262+: allow identification of basic aspects of the document. Included
1263+ in PDF metadata through LaTeX and ConTeXt. These can be set
1264+ through a [pandoc title block][Extension: `pandoc_title_block`],
1265+ which allows for multiple authors, or through a YAML metadata block:
17811266
1782−To include a literal `$` in the document, use `$$`.
1267+ ---
1268+ author:
1269+ - Aristotle
1270+ - Peter Abelard
1271+ ...
17831272
1784−### Interpolated variables
1273+`subtitle`
1274+: document subtitle, included in HTML, EPUB, LaTeX, ConTeXt, and Word docx;
1275+ renders in LaTeX only when using a document class that supports
1276+ `\subtitle`, such as `beamer` or the [KOMA-Script] series (`scrartcl`,
1277+ `scrreprt`, `scrbook`).[^subtitle]
17851278
1786−A slot for an interpolated variable is a variable name surrounded
1787−by matched delimiters. Variable names must begin with a letter
1788−and can contain letters, numbers, `_`, `-`, and `.`. The
1789−keywords `it`, `if`, `else`, `endif`, `for`, `sep`, and `endfor` may
1790−not be used as variable names. Examples:
1279+`institute`
1280+: author affiliations (in LaTeX and Beamer only). Can be a
1281+ list, when there are multiple authors.
17911282
1792−```
1793−$foo$
1794−$foo.bar.baz$
1795−$foo_bar.baz-bim$
1796−$ foo $
1797−${foo}
1798−${foo.bar.baz}
1799−${foo_bar.baz-bim}
1800−${ foo }
1801−```
1283+`abstract`
1284+: document summary, included in LaTeX, ConTeXt, AsciiDoc, and Word docx
18021285
1803−Variable names with periods are used to get at structured
1804−variable values. So, for example, `employee.salary` will return the
1805−value of the `salary` field of the object that is the value of
1806−the `employee` field.
1286+`keywords`
1287+: list of keywords to be included in HTML, PDF, and AsciiDoc metadata;
1288+ may be repeated as for `author`, above
18071289
1808−- If the value of the variable is simple value, it will be
1809− rendered verbatim. (Note that no escaping is done;
1810− the assumption is that the calling program will escape
1811− the strings appropriately for the output format.)
1812−- If the value is a list, the values will be concatenated.
1813−- If the value is a map, the string `true` will be rendered.
1814−- Every other value will be rendered as the empty string.
1290+`header-includes`
1291+: contents specified by `-H/--include-in-header` (may have multiple
1292+ values)
18151293
1816−### Conditionals
1294+`toc`
1295+: non-null value if `--toc/--table-of-contents` was specified
18171296
1818−A conditional begins with `if(variable)` (enclosed in
1819−matched delimiters) and ends with `endif` (enclosed in matched
1820−delimiters). It may optionally contain an `else` (enclosed in
1821−matched delimiters). The `if` section is used if
1822−`variable` has a non-empty value, otherwise the `else`
1823−section is used (if present). Examples:
1297+`toc-title`
1298+: title of table of contents (works only with EPUB,
1299+ opendocument, odt, docx)
18241300
1825−```
1826−$if(foo)$bar$endif$
1301+`include-before`
1302+: contents specified by `-B/--include-before-body` (may have
1303+ multiple values)
18271304
1828−$if(foo)$
1829− $foo$
1830−$endif$
1305+`include-after`
1306+: contents specified by `-A/--include-after-body` (may have
1307+ multiple values)
18311308
1832−$if(foo)$
1833−part one
1834−$else$
1835−part two
1836−$endif$
1309+`body`
1310+: body of document
18371311
1838−${if(foo)}bar${endif}
1312+`meta-json`
1313+: JSON representation of all of the document's metadata. Field
1314+ values are transformed to the selected output format.
18391315
1840−${if(foo)}
1841− ${foo}
1842−${endif}
1316+[^subtitle]: To make `subtitle` work with other LaTeX
1317+ document classes, you can add the following to `header-includes`:
18431318
1844−${if(foo)}
1845−${ foo.bar }
1846−${else}
1847−no foo!
1848−${endif}
1849−```
1319+ \providecommand{\subtitle}[1]{%
1320+ \usepackage{titling}
1321+ \posttitle{%
1322+ \par\large#1\end{center}}
1323+ }
18501324
1851−The keyword `elseif` may be used to simplify complex nested
1852−conditionals:
1325+Language variables
1326+------------------
18531327
1854−```
1855−$if(foo)$
1856−XXX
1857−$elseif(bar)$
1858−YYY
1859−$else$
1860−ZZZ
1861−$endif$
1862−```
1328+`lang`
1329+: identifies the main language of the document,
1330+ using a code according to [BCP 47] (e.g. `en` or `en-GB`).
1331+ For some output formats, pandoc will convert it to an appropriate
1332+ format stored in the additional variables `babel-lang`,
1333+ `polyglossia-lang` (LaTeX) and `context-lang` (ConTeXt).
1334+
1335+ Native pandoc `span`s and `div`s with the lang attribute
1336+ (value in BCP 47) can be used to switch the language in
1337+ that range.
1338+
1339+`otherlangs`
1340+: a list of other languages used in the document
1341+ in the YAML metadata, according to [BCP 47]. For example:
1342+ `otherlangs: [en-GB, fr]`.
1343+ This is automatically generated from the `lang` attributes
1344+ in all `span`s and `div`s but can be overridden.
1345+ Currently only used by LaTeX through the generated
1346+ `babel-otherlangs` and `polyglossia-otherlangs` variables.
1347+ The LaTeX writer outputs polyglossia commands in the text but
1348+ the `babel-newcommands` variable contains mappings for them
1349+ to the corresponding babel.
18631350
1864−### For loops
1351+`dir`
1352+: the base direction of the document, either `rtl` (right-to-left)
1353+ or `ltr` (left-to-right).
18651354
1866−A for loop begins with `for(variable)` (enclosed in
1867−matched delimiters) and ends with `endfor` (enclosed in matched
1868−delimiters.
1355+ For bidirectional documents, native pandoc `span`s and `div`s
1356+ with the `dir` attribute (value `rtl` or `ltr`) can be used to
1357+ override the base direction in some output formats.
1358+ This may not always be necessary if the final renderer
1359+ (e.g. the browser, when generating HTML) supports the
1360+ [Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm].
18691361
1870−- If `variable` is an array, the material inside the loop will
1871− be evaluated repeatedly, with `variable` being set to each
1872− value of the array in turn, and concatenated.
1873−- If `variable` is a map, the material inside will be set to
1874− the map.
1875−- If the value of the associated variable is not an array or
1876− a map, a single iteration will be performed on its value.
1362+ When using LaTeX for bidirectional documents, only the `xelatex` engine
1363+ is fully supported (use `--pdf-engine=xelatex`).
18771364
1878−Examples:
1365+[BCP 47]: https://tools.ietf.org/html/bcp47
1366+[Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm]: http://www.w3.org/International/articles/inline-bidi-markup/uba-basics
18791367
1880−```
1881−$for(foo)$$foo$$sep$, $endfor$
1368+Variables for slides
1369+--------------------
18821370
1883−$for(foo)$
1884− - $foo.last$, $foo.first$
1885−$endfor$
1371+Variables are available for [producing slide shows with pandoc],
1372+including all [reveal.js configuration options].
18861373
1887−${ for(foo.bar) }
1888− - ${ foo.bar.last }, ${ foo.bar.first }
1889−${ endfor }
1374+`titlegraphic`
1375+: title graphic for Beamer documents
18901376
1891−$for(mymap)$
1892−$it.name$: $it.office$
1893−$endfor$
1894−```
1377+`logo`
1378+: logo for Beamer documents
18951379
1896−You may optionally specify a separator between consecutive
1897−values using `sep` (enclosed in matched delimiters). The
1898−material between `sep` and the `endfor` is the separator.
1380+`slidy-url`
1381+: base URL for Slidy documents (defaults to
1382+ `https://www.w3.org/Talks/Tools/Slidy2`)
18991383
1900−```
1901−${ for(foo) }${ foo }${ sep }, ${ endfor }
1902−```
1384+`slideous-url`
1385+: base URL for Slideous documents (defaults to `slideous`)
19031386
1904−Instead of using `variable` inside the loop, the special
1905−anaphoric keyword `it` may be used.
1387+`s5-url`
1388+: base URL for S5 documents (defaults to `s5/default`)
19061389
1907−```
1908−${ for(foo.bar) }
1909− - ${ it.last }, ${ it.first }
1910−${ endfor }
1911−```
1390+`revealjs-url`
1391+: base URL for reveal.js documents (defaults to `reveal.js`)
19121392
1913−### Partials
1393+`theme`, `colortheme`, `fonttheme`, `innertheme`, `outertheme`
1394+: themes for LaTeX [`beamer`] documents
19141395
1915−Partials (subtemplates stored in different files) may be
1916−included by using the name of the partial, followed
1917−by `()`, for example:
1396+`themeoptions`
1397+: options for LaTeX beamer themes (a list).
19181398
1919−```
1920−${ styles() }
1921−```
1399+`navigation`
1400+: controls navigation symbols in `beamer` documents
1401+ (default is `empty` for no navigation symbols; other valid values
1402+ are `frame`, `vertical`, and `horizontal`).
19221403
1923−Partials will be sought in the directory containing
1924−the main template. The file name will be assumed to
1925−have the same extension as the main template if it
1926−lacks an extension. When calling the partial, the
1927−full name including file extension can also be used:
1404+`section-titles`
1405+: enables on "title pages" for new sections in `beamer`
1406+ documents (default = true).
19281407
1929−```
1930−${ styles.html() }
1931−```
1408+`beamerarticle`
1409+: when true, the `beamerarticle` package is loaded (for
1410+ producing an article from beamer slides).
19321411
1933−(If a partial is not found in the directory of the
1934−template and the template path is given as a relative
1935−path, it will also be sought in the `templates`
1936−subdirectory of the user data directory.)
1412+`aspectratio`
1413+: aspect ratio of slides (for beamer only, `1610` for 16:10, `169` for 16:9,
1414+ `149` for 14:9, `141` for 1.41:1, `54` for 5:4, `43` for 4:3 which is the
1415+ default, and `32` for 3:2).
19371416
1938−Partials may optionally be applied to variables using
1939−a colon:
1417+[reveal.js configuration options]: https://github.com/hakimel/reveal.js#configuration
19401418
1941−```
1942−${ date:fancy() }
1419+Variables for LaTeX
1420+-------------------
19431421
1944−${ articles:bibentry() }
1945−```
1422+LaTeX variables are used when [creating a PDF].
19461423
1947−If `articles` is an array, this will iterate over its
1948−values, applying the partial `bibentry()` to each one. So the
1949−second example above is equivalent to
1424+`papersize`
1425+: paper size, e.g. `letter`, `a4`
19501426
1951−```
1952−${ for(articles) }
1953−${ it:bibentry() }
1954−${ endfor }
1955−```
1427+`fontsize`
1428+: font size for body text (e.g. `10pt`, `12pt`)
19561429
1957−Note that the anaphoric keyword `it` must be used when
1958−iterating over partials. In the above examples,
1959−the `bibentry` partial should contain `it.title`
1960−(and so on) instead of `articles.title`.
1430+`documentclass`
1431+: document class, e.g. [`article`], [`report`], [`book`], [`memoir`]
19611432
1962−Final newlines are omitted from included partials.
1433+`classoption`
1434+: option for document class, e.g. `oneside`; may be repeated
1435+ for multiple options
19631436
1964−Partials may include other partials.
1437+`geometry`
1438+: option for [`geometry`] package, e.g. `margin=1in`;
1439+ may be repeated for multiple options
19651440
1966−A separator between values of an array may be specified
1967−in square brackets, immediately after the variable name
1968−or partial:
1441+`margin-left`, `margin-right`, `margin-top`, `margin-bottom`
1442+: sets margins, if `geometry` is not used (otherwise `geometry`
1443+ overrides these)
19691444
1970−```
1971−${months[, ]}$
1445+`linestretch`
1446+: adjusts line spacing using the [`setspace`]
1447+ package, e.g. `1.25`, `1.5`
19721448
1973−${articles:bibentry()[; ]$
1974−```
1449+`fontfamily`
1450+: font package for use with `pdflatex`:
1451+ [TeX Live] includes many options, documented in the [LaTeX Font Catalogue].
1452+ The default is [Latin Modern][`lm`].
19751453
1976−The separator in this case is literal and (unlike with `sep`
1977−in an explicit `for` loop) cannot contain interpolated
1978−variables or other template directives.
1454+`fontfamilyoptions`
1455+: options for package used as `fontfamily`: e.g. `osf,sc` with
1456+ `fontfamily` set to [`mathpazo`] provides Palatino with old-style
1457+ figures and true small caps; may be repeated for multiple options
19791458
1980−### Nesting
1459+`mainfont`, `sansfont`, `monofont`, `mathfont`, `CJKmainfont`
1460+: font families for use with `xelatex` or
1461+ `lualatex`: take the name of any system font, using the
1462+ [`fontspec`] package. Note that if `CJKmainfont` is used,
1463+ the [`xecjk`] package must be available.
19811464
1982−To ensure that content is "nested," that is, subsequent lines
1983−indented, use the `^` directive:
1465+`mainfontoptions`, `sansfontoptions`, `monofontoptions`, `mathfontoptions`, `CJKoptions`
1466+: options to use with `mainfont`, `sansfont`, `monofont`, `mathfont`,
1467+ `CJKmainfont` in `xelatex` and `lualatex`. Allow for any choices
1468+ available through [`fontspec`], such as the OpenType features
1469+ `Numbers=OldStyle,Numbers=Proportional`. May be repeated for multiple options.
19841470
1985−```
1986−$item.number$ $^$$item.description$ ($item.price$)
1987−```
1471+`fontenc`
1472+: allows font encoding to be specified through `fontenc` package (with `pdflatex`);
1473+ default is `T1` (see guide to [LaTeX font encodings])
19881474
1989−In this example, if `item.description` has multiple lines,
1990−they will all be indented to line up with the first line:
1475+`microtypeoptions`
1476+: options to pass to the microtype package
19911477
1992−```
1993−00123 A fine bottle of 18-year old
1994− Oban whiskey. ($148)
1995−```
1478+`colorlinks`
1479+: add color to link text; automatically enabled if any of `linkcolor`, `citecolor`,
1480+ `urlcolor`, or `toccolor` are set
19961481
1997−To nest multiple lines to the same level, align them
1998−with the `^` directive in the template. For example:
1482+`linkcolor`, `citecolor`, `urlcolor`, `toccolor`
1483+: color for internal links, citation links, external links, and links in table of contents:
1484+ uses options allowed by [`xcolor`], including the `dvipsnames`, `svgnames`, and `x11names` lists
19991485
2000−```
2001−$item.number$ $^$$item.description$ ($item.price$)
2002− (Available til $item.sellby$.)
2003−```
1486+`links-as-notes`
1487+: causes links to be printed as footnotes
20041488
2005−will produce
1489+`indent`
1490+: uses document class settings for indentation (the default LaTeX template
1491+ otherwise removes indentation and adds space between paragraphs)
20061492
2007−```
2008−00123 A fine bottle of 18-year old
2009− Oban whiskey. ($148)
2010− (Available til March 30, 2020.)
2011−```
1493+`subparagraph`
1494+: disables default behavior of LaTeX template that redefines (sub)paragraphs
1495+ as sections, changing the appearance of nested headings in some classes
20121496
2013−If a variable occurs by itself on a line, preceded by whitespace
2014−and not followed by further text or directives on the same line,
2015−and the variable's value contains multiple lines, it will be
2016−nested automatically.
1497+`thanks`
1498+: specifies contents of acknowledgments footnote after document title.
20171499
2018−### Breakable spaces
1500+`toc`
1501+: include table of contents (can also be set using `--toc/--table-of-contents`)
20191502
2020−Normally, spaces in the template itself (as opposed to values of
2021−the interpolated variables) are not breakable, but they can be
2022−made breakable in part of the template by using the `~` keyword
2023−(ended with another `~`).
1503+`toc-depth`
1504+: level of section to include in table of contents
20241505
2025−```
2026−$~$This long line may break if the document is rendered
2027−with a short line length.$~$
2028−```
1506+`secnumdepth`
1507+: numbering depth for sections, if sections are numbered
20291508
2030−### Pipes
1509+`lof`, `lot`
1510+: include list of figures, list of tables
20311511
2032−A pipe transforms the value of a variable or partial. Pipes are
2033−specified using a slash (`/`) between the variable name (or partial)
2034−and the pipe name. Example:
1512+`bibliography`
1513+: bibliography to use for resolving references
20351514
2036−```
2037−$for(name)$
2038−$name/uppercase$
2039−$endfor$
1515+`biblio-style`
1516+: bibliography style, when used with `--natbib` and `--biblatex`.
20401517
2041−$for(metadata/pairs)$
2042−- $it.key$: $it.value$
2043−$endfor$
1518+`biblio-title`
1519+: bibliography title, when used with `--natbib` and `--biblatex`.
20441520
2045−$employee:name()/uppercase$
2046−```
1521+`biblatexoptions`
1522+: list of options for biblatex.
20471523
2048−Pipes may be chained:
1524+`natbiboptions`
1525+: list of options for natbib.
20491526
2050−```
2051−$for(employees/pairs)$
2052−$it.key/alpha/uppercase$. $it.name$
2053−$endfor$
2054−```
1527+`pagestyle`
1528+: An option for LaTeX's `\pagestyle{}`. The default article class
1529+ supports 'plain' (default), 'empty', and 'headings'; headings puts
1530+ section titles in the header.
20551531
2056−Some pipes take parameters:
1532+[`article`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/article
1533+[`report`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/report
1534+[`book`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/book
1535+[KOMA-Script]: https://ctan.org/pkg/koma-script
1536+[`memoir`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/memoir
1537+[`xcolor`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/xcolor
1538+[LaTeX Font Catalogue]: http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/
1539+[`mathpazo`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/mathpazo
1540+[LaTeX font encodings]: https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide
20571541
2058−```
2059−|----------------------|------------|
2060−$for(employee)$
2061−$it.name.first/uppercase/left 20 "| "$$it.name.salary/right 10 " | " " |"$
2062−$endfor$
2063−|----------------------|------------|
2064−```
1542+Variables for ConTeXt
1543+---------------------
20651544
2066−Currently the following pipes are predefined:
1545+`papersize`
1546+: paper size, e.g. `letter`, `A4`, `landscape` (see [ConTeXt Paper Setup]);
1547+ may be repeated for multiple options
20671548
2068−- `pairs`: Converts a map or array to an array of maps,
2069− each with `key` and `value` fields. If the original
2070− value was an array, the `key` will be the array index,
2071− starting with 1.
1549+`layout`
1550+: options for page margins and text arrangement (see [ConTeXt Layout]);
1551+ may be repeated for multiple options
20721552
2073−- `uppercase`: Converts text to uppercase.
1553+`margin-left`, `margin-right`, `margin-top`, `margin-bottom`
1554+: sets margins, if `layout` is not used (otherwise `layout`
1555+ overrides these)
20741556
2075−- `lowercase`: Converts text to lowercase.
1557+`fontsize`
1558+: font size for body text (e.g. `10pt`, `12pt`)
20761559
2077−- `length`: Returns the length of the value: number
2078− of characters for a textual value, number of elements
2079− for a map or array.
1560+`mainfont`, `sansfont`, `monofont`, `mathfont`
1561+: font families: take the name of any system font (see [ConTeXt Font Switching])
20801562
2081−- `reverse`: Reverses a textual value or array,
2082− and has no effect on other values.
1563+`linkcolor`, `contrastcolor`
1564+: color for links outside and inside a page, e.g. `red`, `blue` (see [ConTeXt Color])
20831565
2084−- `first`: Returns the first value of an array, if
2085− applied to a non-empty array; otherwise returns
2086− the original value.
1566+`linkstyle`
1567+: typeface style for links, e.g. `normal`, `bold`, `slanted`, `boldslanted`, `type`, `cap`, `small`
20871568
2088−- `last`: Returns the last value of an array, if
2089− applied to a non-empty array; otherwise returns
2090− the original value.
1569+`indenting`
1570+: controls indentation of paragraphs, e.g. `yes,small,next` (see [ConTeXt Indentation]);
1571+ may be repeated for multiple options
20911572
2092−- `rest`: Returns all but the first value of an array, if
2093− applied to a non-empty array; otherwise returns
2094− the original value.
1573+`whitespace`
1574+: spacing between paragraphs, e.g. `none`, `small` (using [`setupwhitespace`])
20951575
2096−- `allbutlast`: Returns all but the last value of an array, if
2097− applied to a non-empty array; otherwise returns
2098− the original value.
1576+`interlinespace`
1577+: adjusts line spacing, e.g. `4ex` (using [`setupinterlinespace`]);
1578+ may be repeated for multiple options
20991579
2100−- `chomp`: Removes trailing newlines (and breakable space).
1580+`headertext`, `footertext`
1581+: text to be placed in running header or footer (see [ConTeXt Headers and Footers]);
1582+ may be repeated up to four times for different placement
21011583
2102−- `nowrap`: Disables line wrapping on breakable spaces.
1584+`pagenumbering`
1585+: page number style and location (using [`setuppagenumbering`]);
1586+ may be repeated for multiple options
21031587
2104−- `alpha`: Converts textual values that can be
2105− read as an integer into lowercase alphabetic
2106− characters `a..z` (mod 26). This can be used to get lettered
2107− enumeration from array indices. To get uppercase
2108− letters, chain with `uppercase`.
1588+`toc`
1589+: include table of contents (can also be set using `--toc/--table-of-contents`)
21091590
2110−- `roman`: Converts textual values that can be
2111− read as an integer into lowercase roman numerials.
2112− This can be used to get lettered enumeration from array indices.
2113− To get uppercase roman, chain with `uppercase`.
1591+`lof`, `lot`
1592+: include list of figures, list of tables
21141593
2115−- `left n "leftborder" "rightborder"`: Renders a textual value
2116− in a block of width `n`, aligned to the left, with an optional
2117− left and right border. Has no effect on other values. This
2118− can be used to align material in tables. Widths are positive
2119− integers indicating the number of characters. Borders
2120− are strings inside double quotes; literal `"` and `\` characters
2121− must be backslash-escaped.
1594+[ConTeXt Paper Setup]: http://wiki.contextgarden.net/PaperSetup
1595+[ConTeXt Layout]: http://wiki.contextgarden.net/Layout
1596+[ConTeXt Font Switching]: http://wiki.contextgarden.net/Font_Switching
1597+[ConTeXt Color]: http://wiki.contextgarden.net/Color
1598+[ConTeXt Headers and Footers]: http://wiki.contextgarden.net/Headers_and_Footers
1599+[ConTeXt Indentation]: http://wiki.contextgarden.net/Indentation
1600+[`setupwhitespace`]: http://wiki.contextgarden.net/Command/setupwhitespace
1601+[`setupinterlinespace`]: http://wiki.contextgarden.net/Command/setupinterlinespace
1602+[`setuppagenumbering`]: http://wiki.contextgarden.net/Command/setuppagenumbering
21221603
2123−- `right n "leftborder" "rightborder"`: Renders a textual value
2124− in a block of width `n`, aligned to the right, and has no
2125− effect on other values.
1604+Variables for man pages
1605+-----------------------
21261606
2127−- `center n "leftborder" "rightborder"`: Renders a textual
2128− value in a block of width `n`, aligned to the center, and has
2129− no effect on other values.
1607+`section`
1608+: section number in man pages
21301609
1610+`header`
1611+: header in man pages
21311612
2132−## Variables
1613+`footer`
1614+: footer in man pages
21331615
2134−### Metadata variables
1616+`adjusting`
1617+: adjusts text to left (`l`), right (`r`), center (`c`),
1618+ or both (`b`) margins
21351619
2136−`title`, `author`, `date`
2137−: allow identification of basic aspects of the document. Included
2138− in PDF metadata through LaTeX and ConTeXt. These can be set
2139− through a [pandoc title block][Extension: `pandoc_title_block`],
2140− which allows for multiple authors, or through a
2141− [YAML metadata block][Extension: `yaml_metadata_block`]:
1620+`hyphenate`
1621+: if `true` (the default), hyphenation will be used
21421622
2143− ---
2144− author:
2145− - Aristotle
2146− - Peter Abelard
2147− ...
1623+Variables for ms
1624+----------------
21481625
2149− Note that if you just want to set PDF or HTML metadata, without
2150− including a title block in the document itself, you can
2151− set the `title-meta`, `author-meta`, and `date-meta`
2152− variables. (By default these are set automatically, based
2153− on `title`, `author`, and `date`.) The page title in HTML
2154− is set by `pagetitle`, which is equal to `title` by default.
1626+`pointsize`
1627+: point size (e.g. `10p`)
21551628
2156−`subtitle`
2157−: document subtitle, included in HTML, EPUB, LaTeX, ConTeXt, and docx
2158− documents
1629+`lineheight`
1630+: line height (e.g. `12p`)
21591631
2160−`abstract`
2161−: document summary, included in LaTeX, ConTeXt, AsciiDoc, and docx
2162− documents
1632+`fontfamily`
1633+: font family (e.g. `T` or `P`)
21631634
2164−`keywords`
2165−: list of keywords to be included in HTML, PDF, ODT, pptx, docx
2166− and AsciiDoc metadata; repeat as for `author`, above
1635+`indent`
1636+: paragraph indent (e.g. `2m`)
21671637
2168−`subject`
2169−: document subject, included in ODT, PDF, docx and pptx metadata
1638+Using variables in templates
1639+----------------------------
21701640
2171−`description`
2172−: document description, included in ODT, docx and pptx metadata. Some
2173− applications show this as `Comments` metadata.
1641+Variable names are sequences of alphanumerics, `-`, and `_`,
1642+starting with a letter. A variable name surrounded by `$` signs
1643+will be replaced by its value. For example, the string `$title$` in
21741644
2175−`category`
2176−: document category, included in docx and pptx metadata
1645+ <title>$title$</title>
21771646
2178−Additionally,
2179−any root-level string metadata, not included in ODT, docx
2180−or pptx metadata is added as a *custom property*.
2181−The following [YAML] metadata block for instance:
1647+will be replaced by the document title.
21821648
2183− ---
2184− title: 'This is the title'
2185− subtitle: "This is the subtitle"
2186− author:
2187− - Author One
2188− - Author Two
2189− description: |
2190− This is a long
2191− description.
1649+To write a literal `$` in a template, use `$$`.
21921650
2193− It consists of two paragraphs
2194− ...
1651+Templates may contain conditionals. The syntax is as follows:
21951652
2196−will include `title`, `author` and `description` as standard document
2197−properties and `subtitle` as a custom property when converting to docx,
2198−ODT or pptx.
1653+ $if(variable)$
1654+ X
1655+ $else$
1656+ Y
1657+ $endif$
21991658
2200−### Language variables
1659+This will include `X` in the template if `variable` has a non-null
1660+value; otherwise it will include `Y`. `X` and `Y` are placeholders for
1661+any valid template text, and may include interpolated variables or other
1662+conditionals. The `$else$` section may be omitted.
22011663
2202−`lang`
2203−: identifies the main language of the document using IETF language
2204− tags (following the [BCP 47] standard), such as `en` or `en-GB`.
2205− The [Language subtag lookup] tool can look up or verify these tags.
2206− This affects most formats, and controls hyphenation in PDF output
2207− when using LaTeX (through [`babel`] and [`polyglossia`]) or ConTeXt.
1664+When variables can have multiple values (for example, `author` in
1665+a multi-author document), you can use the `$for$` keyword:
22081666
2209− Use native pandoc [Divs and Spans] with the `lang` attribute to
2210− switch the language:
1667+ $for(author)$
1668+ <meta name="author" content="$author$" />
1669+ $endfor$
22111670
2212− ---
2213− lang: en-GB
2214− ...
1671+You can optionally specify a separator to be used between
1672+consecutive items:
22151673
2216− Text in the main document language (British English).
1674+ $for(author)$$author$$sep$, $endfor$
22171675
2218− ::: {lang=fr-CA}
2219− > Cette citation est écrite en français canadien.
2220− :::
1676+A dot can be used to select a field of a variable that takes
1677+an object as its value. So, for example:
22211678
2222− More text in English. ['Zitat auf Deutsch.']{lang=de}
1679+ $author.name$ ($author.affiliation$)
22231680
2224−`dir`
2225−: the base script direction, either `rtl` (right-to-left)
2226− or `ltr` (left-to-right).
1681+If you use custom templates, you may need to revise them as pandoc
1682+changes. We recommend tracking the changes in the default templates,
1683+and modifying your custom templates accordingly. An easy way to do this
1684+is to fork the [pandoc-templates] repository and merge in changes after each
1685+pandoc release.
22271686
2228− For bidirectional documents, native pandoc `span`s and
2229− `div`s with the `dir` attribute (value `rtl` or `ltr`) can
2230− be used to override the base direction in some output
2231− formats. This may not always be necessary if the final
2232− renderer (e.g. the browser, when generating HTML) supports
2233− the [Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm].
1687+Templates may contain comments: anything on a line after `$--`
1688+will be treated as a comment and ignored.
22341689
2235− When using LaTeX for bidirectional documents, only the
2236− `xelatex` engine is fully supported (use
2237− `--pdf-engine=xelatex`).
1690+[pandoc-templates]: https://github.com/jgm/pandoc-templates
22381691
2239−[BCP 47]: https://tools.ietf.org/html/bcp47
2240−[Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm]: https://www.w3.org/International/articles/inline-bidi-markup/uba-basics
2241−[Language subtag lookup]: https://r12a.github.io/app-subtags/
1692+Extensions
1693+==========
22421694
2243−### Variables for HTML
1695+The behavior of some of the readers and writers can be adjusted by
1696+enabling or disabling various extensions.
22441697
2245−`document-css`
2246−: Enables inclusion of most of the [CSS] in the `styles.html`
2247− [partial](#partials) (have a look with
2248− `pandoc --print-default-data-file=templates/styles.html`).
2249− Unless you use [`--css`](#option--css), this variable
2250− is set to `true` by default. You can disable it with
2251− e.g. `pandoc -M document-css=false`.
1698+An extension can be enabled by adding `+EXTENSION`
1699+to the format name and disabled by adding `-EXTENSION`. For example,
1700+`--from markdown_strict+footnotes` is strict Markdown with footnotes
1701+enabled, while `--from markdown-footnotes-pipe_tables` is pandoc's
1702+Markdown without footnotes or pipe tables.
22521703
2253−`mainfont`
2254−: sets the CSS `font-family` property on the `html` element.
1704+The markdown reader and writer make by far the most use of extensions.
1705+Extensions only used by them are therefore covered in the
1706+section [Pandoc's Markdown] below (See [Markdown variants] for
1707+`commonmark` and `gfm`.) In the following, extensions that also work
1708+for other formats are covered.
22551709
2256−`fontsize`
2257−: sets the base CSS `font-size`, which you'd usually set
2258− to e.g. `20px`, but it also accepts `pt`
2259− (12pt = 16px in most browsers).
1710+Typography
1711+----------
22601712
2261−`fontcolor`
2262−: sets the CSS `color` property on the `html` element.
1713+#### Extension: `smart` ####
22631714
2264−`linkcolor`
2265−: sets the CSS `color` property on all links.
1715+Interpret straight quotes as curly quotes, `---` as em-dashes,
1716+`--` as en-dashes, and `...` as ellipses. Nonbreaking spaces are
1717+inserted after certain abbreviations, such as "Mr."
22661718
2267−`monofont`
2268−: sets the CSS `font-family` property on `code` elements.
1719+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
22691720
2270−`monobackgroundcolor`
2271−: sets the CSS `background-color` property on `code` elements
2272− and adds extra padding.
1721+input formats
1722+: `markdown`, `commonmark`, `latex`, `mediawiki`, `org`, `rst`, `twiki`
22731723
2274−`linestretch`
2275−: sets the CSS `line-height` property on the `html` element,
2276− which is preferred to be unitless.
1724+output formats
1725+: `markdown`, `latex`, `context`, `rst`
22771726
2278−`backgroundcolor`
2279−: sets the CSS `background-color` property on the `html` element.
1727+enabled by default in
1728+: `markdown`, `latex`, `context` (both input and output)
22801729
2281−`margin-left`, `margin-right`, `margin-top`, `margin-bottom`
2282−: sets the corresponding CSS `padding` properties on the `body` element.
1730+Note: If you are *writing* Markdown, then the `smart` extension
1731+has the reverse effect: what would have been curly quotes comes
1732+out straight.
22831733
2284−To override or extend some [CSS] for just one document, include for example:
1734+In LaTeX, `smart` means to use the standard TeX ligatures
1735+for quotation marks (` `` ` and ` '' ` for double quotes,
1736+`` ` `` and `` ' `` for single quotes) and dashes (`--` for
1737+en-dash and `---` for em-dash). If `smart` is disabled,
1738+then in reading LaTeX pandoc will parse these characters
1739+literally. In writing LaTeX, enabling `smart` tells pandoc
1740+to use the ligatures when possible; if `smart` is disabled
1741+pandoc will use unicode quotation mark and dash characters.
22851742
2286− ---
2287− header-includes: |
2288− <style>
2289− blockquote {
2290− font-style: italic;
2291− }
2292− tr.even {
2293− background-color: #f0f0f0;
2294− }
2295− td, th {
2296− padding: 0.5em 2em 0.5em 0.5em;
2297− }
2298− tbody {
2299− border-bottom: none;
2300− }
2301− </style>
2302− ---
1743+Headers and sections
1744+--------------------
23031745
2304−[CSS]: https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Learn/CSS
1746+#### Extension: `auto_identifiers` ####
23051747
2306−### Variables for HTML math
1748+A header without an explicitly specified identifier will be
1749+automatically assigned a unique identifier based on the header text.
23071750
2308−`classoption`
2309−: when using [KaTeX](#option--katex), you can render display
2310−math equations flush left using [YAML metadata](#layout) or with
2311−`-M classoption=fleqn`.
1751+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
23121752
2313−### Variables for HTML slides
1753+input formats
1754+: `markdown`, `latex`, `rst`, `mediawiki`, `textile`
23141755
2315−These affect HTML output when [producing slide shows with pandoc].
1756+output formats
1757+: `markdown`, `muse`
23161758
2317−`institute`
2318−: author affiliations: can be a list when there are multiple authors
1759+enabled by default in
1760+: `markdown`, `muse`
23191761
2320−`revealjs-url`
2321−: base URL for reveal.js documents (defaults to
2322− `https://unpkg.com/reveal.js@^4/`)
1762+The algorithm used to derive the identifier from the header text is:
23231763
2324−`s5-url`
2325−: base URL for S5 documents (defaults to `s5/default`)
1764+ - Remove all formatting, links, etc.
1765+ - Remove all footnotes.
1766+ - Remove all punctuation, except underscores, hyphens, and periods.
1767+ - Replace all spaces and newlines with hyphens.
1768+ - Convert all alphabetic characters to lowercase.
1769+ - Remove everything up to the first letter (identifiers may
1770+ not begin with a number or punctuation mark).
1771+ - If nothing is left after this, use the identifier `section`.
23261772
2327−`slidy-url`
2328−: base URL for Slidy documents (defaults to
2329− `https://www.w3.org/Talks/Tools/Slidy2`)
1773+Thus, for example,
23301774
2331−`slideous-url`
2332−: base URL for Slideous documents (defaults to `slideous`)
1775+ Header Identifier
1776+ ------------------------------- ----------------------------
1777+ `Header identifiers in HTML` `header-identifiers-in-html`
1778+ `*Dogs*?--in *my* house?` `dogs--in-my-house`
1779+ `[HTML], [S5], or [RTF]?` `html-s5-or-rtf`
1780+ `3. Applications` `applications`
1781+ `33` `section`
23331782
2334−`title-slide-attributes`
2335−: additional attributes for the title slide of reveal.js slide shows.
2336− See [background in reveal.js and beamer] for an example.
1783+These rules should, in most cases, allow one to determine the identifier
1784+from the header text. The exception is when several headers have the
1785+same text; in this case, the first will get an identifier as described
1786+above; the second will get the same identifier with `-1` appended; the
1787+third with `-2`; and so on.
23371788
2338−All [reveal.js configuration options] are available as variables.
2339−To turn off boolean flags that default to true in reveal.js, use `0`.
1789+These identifiers are used to provide link targets in the table of
1790+contents generated by the `--toc|--table-of-contents` option. They
1791+also make it easy to provide links from one section of a document to
1792+another. A link to this section, for example, might look like this:
23401793
2341−[reveal.js configuration options]: https://revealjs.com/config/
1794+ See the section on
1795+ [header identifiers](#header-identifiers-in-html-latex-and-context).
23421796
2343−### Variables for Beamer slides
1797+Note, however, that this method of providing links to sections works
1798+only in HTML, LaTeX, and ConTeXt formats.
23441799
2345−These variables change the appearance of PDF slides using [`beamer`].
1800+If the `--section-divs` option is specified, then each section will
1801+be wrapped in a `section` (or a `div`, if `html4` was specified),
1802+and the identifier will be attached to the enclosing `<section>`
1803+(or `<div>`) tag rather than the header itself. This allows entire
1804+sections to be manipulated using JavaScript or treated differently in
1805+CSS.
23461806
2347−`aspectratio`
2348−: slide aspect ratio (`43` for 4:3 [default], `169` for 16:9,
2349− `1610` for 16:10, `149` for 14:9, `141` for 1.41:1, `54` for 5:4,
2350− `32` for 3:2)
1807+#### Extension: `ascii_identifiers` ####
23511808
2352−`beamerarticle`
2353−: produce an article from Beamer slides
1809+Causes the identifiers produced by `auto_identifiers` to be pure ASCII.
1810+Accents are stripped off of accented Latin letters, and non-Latin
1811+letters are omitted.
23541812
2355−`beameroption`
2356−: add extra beamer option with `\setbeameroption{}`
1813+Math Input
1814+----------
23571815
2358−`institute`
2359−: author affiliations: can be a list when there are multiple authors
1816+The extensions [`tex_math_dollars`](#extension-tex_math_dollars),
1817+[`tex_math_single_backslash`](#extension-tex_math_single_backslash), and
1818+[`tex_math_double_backslash`](#extension-tex_math_double_backslash)
1819+are described in the section about Pandoc's Markdown.
23601820
2361−`logo`
2362−: logo image for slides
1821+However, they can also be used with HTML input. This is handy for
1822+reading web pages formatted using MathJax, for example.
23631823
2364−`navigation`
2365−: controls navigation symbols (default is `empty` for no navigation
2366− symbols; other valid values are `frame`, `vertical`, and `horizontal`)
1824+Raw HTML/TeX
1825+------------
23671826
2368−`section-titles`
2369−: enables "title pages" for new sections (default is true)
1827+The following extensions (especially how they affect Markdown
1828+input/output) are also described in more detail in their respective
1829+sections of [Pandoc's Markdown].
23701830
2371−`theme`, `colortheme`, `fonttheme`, `innertheme`, `outertheme`
2372−: beamer themes
1831+#### [Extension: `raw_html`] {#raw_html}
23731832
2374−`themeoptions`
2375−: options for LaTeX beamer themes (a list).
1833+When converting from HTML, parse elements to raw HTML which are not
1834+representable in pandoc's AST.
1835+By default, this is disabled for HTML input.
23761836
2377−`titlegraphic`
2378−: image for title slide
1837+#### [Extension: `raw_tex`] {#raw_tex}
23791838
2380−### Variables for PowerPoint
1839+Allows raw LaTeX, TeX, and ConTeXt to be included in a document.
23811840
2382−These variables control the visual aspects of a slide show that
2383−are not easily controlled via templates.
1841+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats
1842+(in addition to `markdown`):
23841843
2385−`monofont`
2386−: font to use for code.
1844+input formats
1845+: `latex`, `org`, `textile`
23871846
2388−### Variables for LaTeX
1847+output formats
1848+: `textile`
23891849
2390−Pandoc uses these variables when [creating a PDF] with a LaTeX engine.
1850+#### [Extension: `native_divs`] {#native_divs}
23911851
2392−#### Layout
1852+This extension is enabled by default for HTML input. This means that
1853+`div`s are parsed to pandoc native elements. (Alternatively, you
1854+can parse them to raw HTML using `-f html-native_divs+raw_html`.)
23931855
2394−`block-headings`
2395−: make `\paragraph` and `\subparagraph` (fourth- and
2396− fifth-level headings, or fifth- and sixth-level with book
2397− classes) free-standing rather than run-in; requires further
2398− formatting to distinguish from `\subsubsection` (third- or
2399− fourth-level headings). Instead of using this option,
2400− [KOMA-Script] can adjust headings more extensively:
1856+When converting HTML to Markdown, for example, you may want to drop all
1857+`div`s and `span`s:
24011858
2402− ---
2403− documentclass: scrartcl
2404− header-includes: |
2405− \RedeclareSectionCommand[
2406− beforeskip=-10pt plus -2pt minus -1pt,
2407− afterskip=1sp plus -1sp minus 1sp,
2408− font=\normalfont\itshape]{paragraph}
2409− \RedeclareSectionCommand[
2410− beforeskip=-10pt plus -2pt minus -1pt,
2411− afterskip=1sp plus -1sp minus 1sp,
2412− font=\normalfont\scshape,
2413− indent=0pt]{subparagraph}
2414− ...
1859+ pandoc -f html-native_divs-native_spans -t markdown
24151860
2416−`classoption`
2417−: option for document class, e.g. `oneside`; repeat for multiple options:
1861+#### [Extension: `native_spans`] {#native_spans}
24181862
2419− ---
2420− classoption:
2421− - twocolumn
2422− - landscape
2423− ...
1863+Analogous to `native_divs` above.
24241864
2425−`documentclass`
2426−: document class: usually one of the standard classes,
2427− [`article`], [`book`], and [`report`]; the [KOMA-Script]
2428− equivalents, `scrartcl`, `scrbook`, and `scrreprt`, which
2429− default to smaller margins; or [`memoir`]
24301865
2431−`geometry`
2432−: option for [`geometry`] package, e.g. `margin=1in`;
2433− repeat for multiple options:
1866+Literate Haskell support
1867+------------------------
24341868
2435− ---
2436− geometry:
2437− - top=30mm
2438− - left=20mm
2439− - heightrounded
2440− ...
1869+#### Extension: `literate_haskell` ####
24411870
2442−`hyperrefoptions`
2443−: option for [`hyperref`] package, e.g. `linktoc=all`;
2444− repeat for multiple options:
1871+Treat the document as literate Haskell source.
24451872
2446− ---
2447− hyperrefoptions:
2448− - linktoc=all
2449− - pdfwindowui
2450− - pdfpagemode=FullScreen
2451− ...
1873+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
24521874
2453−`indent`
2454−: if true, pandoc will use document class settings for
2455− indentation (the default LaTeX template otherwise removes
2456− indentation and adds space between paragraphs)
1875+input formats
1876+: `markdown`, `rst`, `latex`
24571877
2458−`linestretch`
2459−: adjusts line spacing using the [`setspace`]
2460− package, e.g. `1.25`, `1.5`
1878+output formats
1879+: `markdown`, `rst`, `latex`, `html`
24611880
2462−`margin-left`, `margin-right`, `margin-top`, `margin-bottom`
2463−: sets margins if `geometry` is not used (otherwise `geometry`
2464− overrides these)
1881+If you append `+lhs` (or `+literate_haskell`) to one of the formats
1882+above, pandoc will treat the document as literate Haskell source.
1883+This means that
24651884
2466−`pagestyle`
2467−: control `\pagestyle{}`: the default article class
2468− supports `plain` (default), `empty` (no running heads or page numbers),
2469− and `headings` (section titles in running heads)
1885+ - In Markdown input, "bird track" sections will be parsed as Haskell
1886+ code rather than block quotations. Text between `\begin{code}`
1887+ and `\end{code}` will also be treated as Haskell code. For
1888+ ATX-style headers the character '=' will be used instead of '#'.
24701889
2471−`papersize`
2472−: paper size, e.g. `letter`, `a4`
1890+ - In Markdown output, code blocks with classes `haskell` and `literate`
1891+ will be rendered using bird tracks, and block quotations will be
1892+ indented one space, so they will not be treated as Haskell code.
1893+ In addition, headers will be rendered setext-style (with underlines)
1894+ rather than ATX-style (with '#' characters). (This is because ghc
1895+ treats '#' characters in column 1 as introducing line numbers.)
24731896
2474−`secnumdepth`
2475−: numbering depth for sections (with `--number-sections` option
2476− or `numbersections` variable)
1897+ - In restructured text input, "bird track" sections will be parsed
1898+ as Haskell code.
24771899
2478−#### Fonts
1900+ - In restructured text output, code blocks with class `haskell` will
1901+ be rendered using bird tracks.
24791902
2480−`fontenc`
2481−: allows font encoding to be specified through `fontenc` package (with
2482− `pdflatex`); default is `T1` (see [LaTeX font encodings guide])
1903+ - In LaTeX input, text in `code` environments will be parsed as
1904+ Haskell code.
24831905
2484−`fontfamily`
2485−: font package for use with `pdflatex`:
2486− [TeX Live] includes many options, documented in the [LaTeX Font Catalogue].
2487− The default is [Latin Modern][`lm`].
1906+ - In LaTeX output, code blocks with class `haskell` will be rendered
1907+ inside `code` environments.
24881908
2489−`fontfamilyoptions`
2490−: options for package used as `fontfamily`; repeat for multiple options.
2491− For example, to use the Libertine font with proportional lowercase
2492− (old-style) figures through the [`libertinus`] package:
1909+ - In HTML output, code blocks with class `haskell` will be rendered
1910+ with class `literatehaskell` and bird tracks.
24931911
2494− ---
2495− fontfamily: libertinus
2496− fontfamilyoptions:
2497− - osf
2498− - p
2499− ...
1912+Examples:
25001913
2501−`fontsize`
2502−: font size for body text. The standard classes allow 10pt, 11pt, and
2503− 12pt. To use another size, set `documentclass` to one of
2504− the [KOMA-Script] classes, such as `scrartcl` or `scrbook`.
1914+ pandoc -f markdown+lhs -t html
25051915
2506−`mainfont`, `sansfont`, `monofont`, `mathfont`, `CJKmainfont`
2507−: font families for use with `xelatex` or
2508− `lualatex`: take the name of any system font, using the
2509− [`fontspec`] package. `CJKmainfont` uses the [`xecjk`] package.
1916+reads literate Haskell source formatted with Markdown conventions and writes
1917+ordinary HTML (without bird tracks).
25101918
2511−`mainfontoptions`, `sansfontoptions`, `monofontoptions`, `mathfontoptions`, `CJKoptions`
2512−: options to use with `mainfont`, `sansfont`, `monofont`, `mathfont`,
2513− `CJKmainfont` in `xelatex` and `lualatex`. Allow for any
2514− choices available through [`fontspec`]; repeat for multiple
2515− options. For example, to use the [TeX Gyre] version of
2516− Palatino with lowercase figures:
1919+ pandoc -f markdown+lhs -t html+lhs
25171920
2518− ---
2519− mainfont: TeX Gyre Pagella
2520− mainfontoptions:
2521− - Numbers=Lowercase
2522− - Numbers=Proportional
2523− ...
1921+writes HTML with the Haskell code in bird tracks, so it can be copied
1922+and pasted as literate Haskell source.
25241923
2525−`microtypeoptions`
2526−: options to pass to the microtype package
1924+Note that GHC expects the bird tracks in the first column, so indentend literate
1925+code blocks (e.g. inside an itemized environment) will not be picked up by the
1926+Haskell compiler.
25271927
2528−#### Links
1928+Other extensions
1929+----------------
25291930
2530−`colorlinks`
2531−: add color to link text; automatically enabled if any of
2532− `linkcolor`, `filecolor`, `citecolor`, `urlcolor`, or `toccolor` are set
1931+#### Extension: `empty_paragraphs` ####
25331932
2534−`linkcolor`, `filecolor`, `citecolor`, `urlcolor`, `toccolor`
2535−: color for internal links, external links, citation links, linked
2536− URLs, and links in table of contents, respectively: uses options
2537− allowed by [`xcolor`], including the `dvipsnames`, `svgnames`, and
2538− `x11names` lists
1933+Allows empty paragraphs. By default empty paragraphs are
1934+omitted.
25391935
2540−`links-as-notes`
2541−: causes links to be printed as footnotes
1936+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
25421937
2543−#### Front matter
1938+input formats
1939+: `docx`, `html`
25441940
2545−`lof`, `lot`
2546−: include list of figures, list of tables
1941+output formats
1942+: `markdown`, `docx`, `odt`, `opendocument`, `html`
25471943
2548−`thanks`
2549−: contents of acknowledgments footnote after document title
1944+#### Extension: `amuse` ####
25501945
2551−`toc`
2552−: include table of contents (can also be set using
2553− `--toc/--table-of-contents`)
1946+In the `muse` input format, this enables Text::Amuse
1947+extensions to Emacs Muse markup.
25541948
2555−`toc-depth`
2556−: level of section to include in table of contents
1949+#### Extension: `citations` {#org-citations}
25571950
2558−#### BibLaTeX Bibliographies
1951+Some aspects of [Pandoc's Markdown citation syntax](#citations) are also accepted
1952+in `org` input.
25591953
2560−These variables function when using BibLaTeX for [citation rendering].
25611954
2562−`biblatexoptions`
2563−: list of options for biblatex
1955+Pandoc's Markdown
1956+=================
25641957
2565−`biblio-style`
2566−: bibliography style, when used with `--natbib` and `--biblatex`.
1958+Pandoc understands an extended and slightly revised version of
1959+John Gruber's [Markdown] syntax. This document explains the syntax,
1960+noting differences from standard Markdown. Except where noted, these
1961+differences can be suppressed by using the `markdown_strict` format instead
1962+of `markdown`. Extensions can be enabled or disabled to specify the
1963+behavior more granularly. They are described in the following. See also
1964+[Extensions] above, for extensions that work also on other formats.
25671965
2568−`biblio-title`
2569−: bibliography title, when used with `--natbib` and `--biblatex`.
1966+Philosophy
1967+----------
25701968
2571−`bibliography`
2572−: bibliography to use for resolving references
1969+Markdown is designed to be easy to write, and, even more importantly,
1970+easy to read:
25731971
2574−`natbiboptions`
2575−: list of options for natbib
1972+> A Markdown-formatted document should be publishable as-is, as plain
1973+> text, without looking like it's been marked up with tags or formatting
1974+> instructions.
1975+> -- [John Gruber](http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/syntax#philosophy)
25761976
2577−[KOMA-Script]: https://ctan.org/pkg/koma-script
2578−[LaTeX Font Catalogue]: https://tug.org/FontCatalogue/
2579−[LaTeX font encodings guide]: https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide
2580−[TeX Gyre]: http://www.gust.org.pl/projects/e-foundry/tex-gyre
2581−[`article`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/article
2582−[`book`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/book
2583−[`libertinus`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/libertinus
2584−[`memoir`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/memoir
2585−[`report`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/report
1977+This principle has guided pandoc's decisions in finding syntax for
1978+tables, footnotes, and other extensions.
25861979
2587−### Variables for ConTeXt
1980+There is, however, one respect in which pandoc's aims are different
1981+from the original aims of Markdown. Whereas Markdown was originally
1982+designed with HTML generation in mind, pandoc is designed for multiple
1983+output formats. Thus, while pandoc allows the embedding of raw HTML,
1984+it discourages it, and provides other, non-HTMLish ways of representing
1985+important document elements like definition lists, tables, mathematics, and
1986+footnotes.
25881987
2589−Pandoc uses these variables when [creating a PDF] with ConTeXt.
1988+Paragraphs
1989+----------
25901990
2591−`fontsize`
2592−: font size for body text (e.g. `10pt`, `12pt`)
1991+A paragraph is one or more lines of text followed by one or more blank lines.
1992+Newlines are treated as spaces, so you can reflow your paragraphs as you like.
1993+If you need a hard line break, put two or more spaces at the end of a line.
25931994
2594−`headertext`, `footertext`
2595−: text to be placed in running header or footer (see [ConTeXt Headers and
2596− Footers]); repeat up to four times for different placement
1995+#### Extension: `escaped_line_breaks` ####
25971996
2598−`indenting`
2599−: controls indentation of paragraphs, e.g. `yes,small,next` (see
2600− [ConTeXt Indentation]); repeat for multiple options
1997+A backslash followed by a newline is also a hard line break.
1998+Note: in multiline and grid table cells, this is the only way
1999+to create a hard line break, since trailing spaces in the cells
2000+are ignored.
26012001
2602−`interlinespace`
2603−: adjusts line spacing, e.g. `4ex` (using [`setupinterlinespace`]);
2604− repeat for multiple options
2002+Headers
2003+-------
26052004
2606−`layout`
2607−: options for page margins and text arrangement (see [ConTeXt Layout]);
2608− repeat for multiple options
2005+There are two kinds of headers: Setext and ATX.
26092006
2610−`linkcolor`, `contrastcolor`
2611−: color for links outside and inside a page, e.g. `red`, `blue` (see
2612− [ConTeXt Color])
2007+### Setext-style headers ###
26132008
2614−`linkstyle`
2615−: typeface style for links, e.g. `normal`, `bold`, `slanted`, `boldslanted`,
2616− `type`, `cap`, `small`
2009+A setext-style header is a line of text "underlined" with a row of `=` signs
2010+(for a level one header) or `-` signs (for a level two header):
26172011
2618−`lof`, `lot`
2619−: include list of figures, list of tables
2012+ A level-one header
2013+ ==================
26202014
2621−`mainfont`, `sansfont`, `monofont`, `mathfont`
2622−: font families: take the name of any system font (see
2623− [ConTeXt Font Switching])
2015+ A level-two header
2016+ ------------------
26242017
2625−`margin-left`, `margin-right`, `margin-top`, `margin-bottom`
2626−: sets margins, if `layout` is not used (otherwise `layout`
2627− overrides these)
2018+The header text can contain inline formatting, such as emphasis (see
2019+[Inline formatting], below).
26282020
2629−`pagenumbering`
2630−: page number style and location (using [`setuppagenumbering`]);
2631− repeat for multiple options
26322021
2633−`papersize`
2634−: paper size, e.g. `letter`, `A4`, `landscape` (see [ConTeXt Paper Setup]);
2635− repeat for multiple options
2636−
2637−`pdfa`
2638−: adds to the preamble the setup necessary to generate PDF/A
2639− of the type specified, e.g. `1a:2005`, `2a`. If no type is
2640− specified (i.e. the value is set to True, by e.g.
2641− `--metadata=pdfa` or `pdfa: true` in a YAML metadata block),
2642− `1b:2005` will be used as default, for reasons of backwards
2643− compatibility. Using `--variable=pdfa` without specified value
2644− is not supported. To successfully generate PDF/A the required
2645− ICC color profiles have to be available and the content and all
2646− included files (such as images) have to be standard conforming.
2647− The ICC profiles and output intent may be specified using the
2648− variables `pdfaiccprofile` and `pdfaintent`. See also [ConTeXt
2649− PDFA] for more details.
2650−
2651−`pdfaiccprofile`
2652−: when used in conjunction with `pdfa`, specifies the ICC profile to use
2653− in the PDF, e.g. `default.cmyk`. If left unspecified, `sRGB.icc` is
2654− used as default. May be repeated to include multiple profiles. Note that
2655− the profiles have to be available on the system. They can be obtained
2656− from [ConTeXt ICC Profiles].
2657−
2658−`pdfaintent`
2659−: when used in conjunction with `pdfa`, specifies the output intent for
2660− the colors, e.g. `ISO coated v2 300\letterpercent\space (ECI)`
2661− If left unspecified, `sRGB IEC61966-2.1` is used as default.
2022+### ATX-style headers ###
26622023
2663−`toc`
2664−: include table of contents (can also be set using
2665− `--toc/--table-of-contents`)
2024+An ATX-style header consists of one to six `#` signs and a line of
2025+text, optionally followed by any number of `#` signs. The number of
2026+`#` signs at the beginning of the line is the header level:
26662027
2667−`whitespace`
2668−: spacing between paragraphs, e.g. `none`, `small` (using
2669− [`setupwhitespace`])
2028+ ## A level-two header
26702029
2671−`includesource`
2672−: include all source documents as file attachments in the PDF file
2030+ ### A level-three header ###
26732031
2674−[ConTeXt Paper Setup]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/PaperSetup
2675−[ConTeXt Layout]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/Layout
2676−[ConTeXt Font Switching]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/Font_Switching
2677−[ConTeXt Color]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/Color
2678−[ConTeXt Headers and Footers]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/Headers_and_Footers
2679−[ConTeXt Indentation]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/Indentation
2680−[ConTeXt ICC Profiles]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/PDFX#ICC_profiles
2681−[ConTeXt PDFA]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/PDF/A
2682−[`setupwhitespace`]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/Command/setupwhitespace
2683−[`setupinterlinespace`]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/Command/setupinterlinespace
2684−[`setuppagenumbering`]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/Command/setuppagenumbering
2032+As with setext-style headers, the header text can contain formatting:
26852033
2686−### Variables for `wkhtmltopdf`
2034+ # A level-one header with a [link](/url) and *emphasis*
26872035
2688−Pandoc uses these variables when [creating a PDF] with [`wkhtmltopdf`].
2689−The `--css` option also affects the output.
2036+#### Extension: `blank_before_header` ####
26902037
2691−`footer-html`, `header-html`
2692−: add information to the header and footer
2038+Standard Markdown syntax does not require a blank line before a header.
2039+Pandoc does require this (except, of course, at the beginning of the
2040+document). The reason for the requirement is that it is all too easy for a
2041+`#` to end up at the beginning of a line by accident (perhaps through line
2042+wrapping). Consider, for example:
26932043
2694−`margin-left`, `margin-right`, `margin-top`, `margin-bottom`
2695−: set the page margins
2044+ I like several of their flavors of ice cream:
2045+ #22, for example, and #5.
26962046
2697−`papersize`
2698−: sets the PDF paper size
2047+#### Extension: `space_in_atx_header` ####
26992048
2700−### Variables for man pages
2049+Many Markdown implementations do not require a space between the
2050+opening `#`s of an ATX header and the header text, so that
2051+`#5 bolt` and `#hashtag` count as headers. With this extension,
2052+pandoc does require the space.
27012053
2702−`adjusting`
2703−: adjusts text to left (`l`), right (`r`), center (`c`),
2704− or both (`b`) margins
2054+### Header identifiers ###
27052055
2706−`footer`
2707−: footer in man pages
2056+See also the [`auto_identifiers` extension](#extension-auto_identifiers) above.
27082057
2709−`header`
2710−: header in man pages
2058+#### Extension: `header_attributes` ####
27112059
2712−`hyphenate`
2713−: if `true` (the default), hyphenation will be used
2060+Headers can be assigned attributes using this syntax at the end
2061+of the line containing the header text:
27142062
2715−`section`
2716−: section number in man pages
2063+ {#identifier .class .class key=value key=value}
27172064
2718−### Variables for ms
2065+Thus, for example, the following headers will all be assigned the identifier
2066+`foo`:
27192067
2720−`fontfamily`
2721−: font family (e.g. `T` or `P`)
2068+ # My header {#foo}
27222069
2723−`indent`
2724−: paragraph indent (e.g. `2m`)
2070+ ## My header ## {#foo}
27252071
2726−`lineheight`
2727−: line height (e.g. `12p`)
2072+ My other header {#foo}
2073+ ---------------
27282074
2729−`pointsize`
2730−: point size (e.g. `10p`)
2075+(This syntax is compatible with [PHP Markdown Extra].)
27312076
2732−### Variables set automatically
2077+Note that although this syntax allows assignment of classes and key/value
2078+attributes, writers generally don't use all of this information. Identifiers,
2079+classes, and key/value attributes are used in HTML and HTML-based formats such
2080+as EPUB and slidy. Identifiers are used for labels and link anchors in the
2081+LaTeX, ConTeXt, Textile, and AsciiDoc writers.
27332082
2734−Pandoc sets these variables automatically in response to [options] or
2735−document contents; users can also modify them. These vary depending
2736−on the output format, and include the following:
2083+Headers with the class `unnumbered` will not be numbered, even if
2084+`--number-sections` is specified. A single hyphen (`-`) in an attribute
2085+context is equivalent to `.unnumbered`, and preferable in non-English
2086+documents. So,
27372087
2738−`body`
2739−: body of document
2088+ # My header {-}
27402089
2741−`date-meta`
2742−: the `date` variable converted to ISO 8601 YYYY-MM-DD,
2743− included in all HTML based formats (dzslides, epub,
2744− html, html4, html5, revealjs, s5, slideous, slidy).
2745− The recognized formats for `date` are: `mm/dd/yyyy`,
2746− `mm/dd/yy`, `yyyy-mm-dd` (ISO 8601), `dd MM yyyy`
2747− (e.g. either `02 Apr 2018` or `02 April 2018`),
2748− `MM dd, yyyy` (e.g. `Apr. 02, 2018` or `April 02, 2018),
2749− `yyyy[mm[dd]]]` (e.g. `20180402, `201804` or `2018`).
2090+is just the same as
27502091
2751−`header-includes`
2752−: contents specified by `-H/--include-in-header` (may have multiple
2753− values)
2092+ # My header {.unnumbered}
27542093
2755−`include-before`
2756−: contents specified by `-B/--include-before-body` (may have
2757− multiple values)
2094+#### Extension: `implicit_header_references` ####
27582095
2759−`include-after`
2760−: contents specified by `-A/--include-after-body` (may have
2761− multiple values)
2096+Pandoc behaves as if reference links have been defined for each header.
2097+So, to link to a header
27622098
2763−`meta-json`
2764−: JSON representation of all of the document's metadata. Field
2765− values are transformed to the selected output format.
2099+ # Header identifiers in HTML
27662100
2767−`numbersections`
2768−: non-null value if `-N/--number-sections` was specified
2101+you can simply write
27692102
2770−`sourcefile`, `outputfile`
2771−: source and destination filenames, as given on the command line.
2772− `sourcefile` can also be a list if input comes from multiple files,
2773− or empty if input is from stdin. You can use the following snippet in
2774− your template to distinguish them:
2103+ [Header identifiers in HTML]
27752104
2776− $if(sourcefile)$
2777− $for(sourcefile)$
2778− $sourcefile$
2779− $endfor$
2780− $else$
2781− (stdin)
2782− $endif$
2105+or
27832106
2784− Similarly, `outputfile` can be `-` if output goes to the terminal.
2107+ [Header identifiers in HTML][]
27852108
2786− If you need absolute paths, use e.g. `$curdir$/$sourcefile$`.
2109+or
27872110
2788−`curdir`
2789−: working directory from which pandoc is run.
2111+ [the section on header identifiers][header identifiers in
2112+ HTML]
27902113
2791−`toc`
2792−: non-null value if `--toc/--table-of-contents` was specified
2114+instead of giving the identifier explicitly:
27932115
2794−`toc-title`
2795−: title of table of contents (works only with EPUB,
2796− HTML, opendocument, odt, docx, pptx, beamer, LaTeX)
2116+ [Header identifiers in HTML](#header-identifiers-in-html)
27972117
2798−[pandoc-templates]: https://github.com/jgm/pandoc-templates
2118+If there are multiple headers with identical text, the corresponding
2119+reference will link to the first one only, and you will need to use explicit
2120+links to link to the others, as described above.
27992121
2800−# Extensions
2122+Like regular reference links, these references are case-insensitive.
28012123
2802−The behavior of some of the readers and writers can be adjusted by
2803−enabling or disabling various extensions.
2124+Explicit link reference definitions always take priority over
2125+implicit header references. So, in the following example, the
2126+link will point to `bar`, not to `#foo`:
28042127
2805−An extension can be enabled by adding `+EXTENSION`
2806−to the format name and disabled by adding `-EXTENSION`. For example,
2807−`--from markdown_strict+footnotes` is strict Markdown with footnotes
2808−enabled, while `--from markdown-footnotes-pipe_tables` is pandoc's
2809−Markdown without footnotes or pipe tables.
2128+ # Foo
28102129
2811−The markdown reader and writer make by far the most use of extensions.
2812−Extensions only used by them are therefore covered in the
2813−section [Pandoc's Markdown] below (See [Markdown variants] for
2814−`commonmark` and `gfm`.) In the following, extensions that also work
2815−for other formats are covered.
2130+ [foo]: bar
28162131
2817−Note that markdown extensions added to the `ipynb` format
2818−affect Markdown cells in Jupyter notebooks (as do command-line
2819−options like `--atx-headers`).
2132+ See [foo]
28202133
2821−## Typography
2134+Block quotations
2135+----------------
28222136
2823−#### Extension: `smart` ####
2137+Markdown uses email conventions for quoting blocks of text.
2138+A block quotation is one or more paragraphs or other block elements
2139+(such as lists or headers), with each line preceded by a `>` character
2140+and an optional space. (The `>` need not start at the left margin, but
2141+it should not be indented more than three spaces.)
28242142
2825−Interpret straight quotes as curly quotes, `---` as em-dashes,
2826−`--` as en-dashes, and `...` as ellipses. Nonbreaking spaces are
2827−inserted after certain abbreviations, such as "Mr."
2828−
2829−This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
2143+ > This is a block quote. This
2144+ > paragraph has two lines.
2145+ >
2146+ > 1. This is a list inside a block quote.
2147+ > 2. Second item.
28302148
2831−input formats
2832−: `markdown`, `commonmark`, `latex`, `mediawiki`, `org`, `rst`, `twiki`
2149+A "lazy" form, which requires the `>` character only on the first
2150+line of each block, is also allowed:
28332151
2834−output formats
2835−: `markdown`, `latex`, `context`, `rst`
2152+ > This is a block quote. This
2153+ paragraph has two lines.
28362154
2837−enabled by default in
2838−: `markdown`, `latex`, `context` (both input and output)
2155+ > 1. This is a list inside a block quote.
2156+ 2. Second item.
28392157
2840−Note: If you are *writing* Markdown, then the `smart` extension
2841−has the reverse effect: what would have been curly quotes comes
2842−out straight.
2158+Among the block elements that can be contained in a block quote are
2159+other block quotes. That is, block quotes can be nested:
28432160
2844−In LaTeX, `smart` means to use the standard TeX ligatures
2845−for quotation marks (` `` ` and ` '' ` for double quotes,
2846−`` ` `` and `` ' `` for single quotes) and dashes (`--` for
2847−en-dash and `---` for em-dash). If `smart` is disabled,
2848−then in reading LaTeX pandoc will parse these characters
2849−literally. In writing LaTeX, enabling `smart` tells pandoc
2850−to use the ligatures when possible; if `smart` is disabled
2851−pandoc will use unicode quotation mark and dash characters.
2161+ > This is a block quote.
2162+ >
2163+ > > A block quote within a block quote.
28522164
2853−## Headings and sections
2165+If the `>` character is followed by an optional space, that space
2166+will be considered part of the block quote marker and not part of
2167+the indentation of the contents. Thus, to put an indented code
2168+block in a block quote, you need five spaces after the `>`:
28542169
2855−#### Extension: `auto_identifiers` ####
2170+ > code
28562171
2857−A heading without an explicitly specified identifier will be
2858−automatically assigned a unique identifier based on the heading text.
2172+#### Extension: `blank_before_blockquote` ####
28592173
2860−This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
2174+Standard Markdown syntax does not require a blank line before a block
2175+quote. Pandoc does require this (except, of course, at the beginning of the
2176+document). The reason for the requirement is that it is all too easy for a
2177+`>` to end up at the beginning of a line by accident (perhaps through line
2178+wrapping). So, unless the `markdown_strict` format is used, the following does
2179+not produce a nested block quote in pandoc:
28612180
2862−input formats
2863−: `markdown`, `latex`, `rst`, `mediawiki`, `textile`
2181+ > This is a block quote.
2182+ >> Nested.
28642183
2865−output formats
2866−: `markdown`, `muse`
28672184
2868−enabled by default in
2869−: `markdown`, `muse`
2185+Verbatim (code) blocks
2186+----------------------
28702187
2871−The default algorithm used to derive the identifier from the
2872−heading text is:
2188+### Indented code blocks ###
28732189
2874− - Remove all formatting, links, etc.
2875− - Remove all footnotes.
2876− - Remove all non-alphanumeric characters,
2877− except underscores, hyphens, and periods.
2878− - Replace all spaces and newlines with hyphens.
2879− - Convert all alphabetic characters to lowercase.
2880− - Remove everything up to the first letter (identifiers may
2881− not begin with a number or punctuation mark).
2882− - If nothing is left after this, use the identifier `section`.
2190+A block of text indented four spaces (or one tab) is treated as verbatim
2191+text: that is, special characters do not trigger special formatting,
2192+and all spaces and line breaks are preserved. For example,
28832193
2884−Thus, for example,
2194+ if (a > 3) {
2195+ moveShip(5 * gravity, DOWN);
2196+ }
28852197
2886− Heading Identifier
2887− ------------------------------- ----------------------------
2888− `Heading identifiers in HTML` `heading-identifiers-in-html`
2889− `Maître d'hôtel` `maître-dhôtel`
2890− `*Dogs*?--in *my* house?` `dogs--in-my-house`
2891− `[HTML], [S5], or [RTF]?` `html-s5-or-rtf`
2892− `3. Applications` `applications`
2893− `33` `section`
2198+The initial (four space or one tab) indentation is not considered part
2199+of the verbatim text, and is removed in the output.
28942200
2895−These rules should, in most cases, allow one to determine the identifier
2896−from the heading text. The exception is when several headings have the
2897−same text; in this case, the first will get an identifier as described
2898−above; the second will get the same identifier with `-1` appended; the
2899−third with `-2`; and so on.
2201+Note: blank lines in the verbatim text need not begin with four spaces.
29002202
2901−(However, a different algorithm is used if
2902−`gfm_auto_identifiers` is enabled; see below.)
29032203
2904−These identifiers are used to provide link targets in the table of
2905−contents generated by the `--toc|--table-of-contents` option. They
2906−also make it easy to provide links from one section of a document to
2907−another. A link to this section, for example, might look like this:
2204+### Fenced code blocks ###
29082205
2909− See the section on
2910− [heading identifiers](#heading-identifiers-in-html-latex-and-context).
2206+#### Extension: `fenced_code_blocks` ####
29112207
2912−Note, however, that this method of providing links to sections works
2913−only in HTML, LaTeX, and ConTeXt formats.
2208+In addition to standard indented code blocks, pandoc supports
2209+*fenced* code blocks. These begin with a row of three or more
2210+tildes (`~`) and end with a row of tildes that must be at least as long as
2211+the starting row. Everything between these lines is treated as code. No
2212+indentation is necessary:
29142213
2915−If the `--section-divs` option is specified, then each section will
2916−be wrapped in a `section` (or a `div`, if `html4` was specified),
2917−and the identifier will be attached to the enclosing `<section>`
2918−(or `<div>`) tag rather than the heading itself. This allows entire
2919−sections to be manipulated using JavaScript or treated differently in
2920−CSS.
2214+ ~~~~~~~
2215+ if (a > 3) {
2216+ moveShip(5 * gravity, DOWN);
2217+ }
2218+ ~~~~~~~
29212219
2922−#### Extension: `ascii_identifiers` ####
2220+Like regular code blocks, fenced code blocks must be separated
2221+from surrounding text by blank lines.
29232222
2924−Causes the identifiers produced by `auto_identifiers` to be pure ASCII.
2925−Accents are stripped off of accented Latin letters, and non-Latin
2926−letters are omitted.
2223+If the code itself contains a row of tildes or backticks, just use a longer
2224+row of tildes or backticks at the start and end:
29272225
2928−#### Extension: `gfm_auto_identifiers` ####
2226+ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2227+ ~~~~~~~~~~
2228+ code including tildes
2229+ ~~~~~~~~~~
2230+ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
29292231
2930−Changes the algorithm used by `auto_identifiers` to conform to
2931−GitHub's method. Spaces are converted to dashes (`-`),
2932−uppercase characters to lowercase characters, and punctuation
2933−characters other than `-` and `_` are removed.
2934−Emojis are replaced by their names.
2232+#### Extension: `backtick_code_blocks` ####
29352233
2936−## Math Input
2234+Same as `fenced_code_blocks`, but uses backticks (`` ` ``) instead of tildes
2235+(`~`).
29372236
2938−The extensions [`tex_math_dollars`](#extension-tex_math_dollars),
2939−[`tex_math_single_backslash`](#extension-tex_math_single_backslash), and
2940−[`tex_math_double_backslash`](#extension-tex_math_double_backslash)
2941−are described in the section about Pandoc's Markdown.
2237+#### Extension: `fenced_code_attributes` ####
29422238
2943−However, they can also be used with HTML input. This is handy for
2944−reading web pages formatted using MathJax, for example.
2239+Optionally, you may attach attributes to fenced or backtick code block using
2240+this syntax:
29452241
2946−## Raw HTML/TeX
2242+ ~~~~ {#mycode .haskell .numberLines startFrom="100"}
2243+ qsort [] = []
2244+ qsort (x:xs) = qsort (filter (< x) xs) ++ [x] ++
2245+ qsort (filter (>= x) xs)
2246+ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
29472247
2948−The following extensions are described in more detail in
2949−their respective sections of [Pandoc's Markdown]:
2248+Here `mycode` is an identifier, `haskell` and `numberLines` are classes, and
2249+`startFrom` is an attribute with value `100`. Some output formats can use this
2250+information to do syntax highlighting. Currently, the only output formats
2251+that uses this information are HTML, LaTeX, Docx, and Ms. If highlighting
2252+is supported for your output format and language, then the code block above
2253+will appear highlighted, with numbered lines. (To see which languages are
2254+supported, type `pandoc --list-highlight-languages`.) Otherwise, the code
2255+block above will appear as follows:
29502256
2951−- [`raw_html`](#extension-raw_html) allows HTML elements which
2952− are not representable in pandoc's AST to be parsed as raw HTML.
2953− By default, this is disabled for HTML input.
2257+ <pre id="mycode" class="haskell numberLines" startFrom="100">
2258+ <code>
2259+ ...
2260+ </code>
2261+ </pre>
29542262
2955−- [`raw_tex`](#extension-raw_tex) allows raw LaTeX, TeX, and ConTeXt
2956− to be included in a document. This extension can be enabled/disabled
2957− for the following formats (in addition to `markdown`):
2263+The `numberLines` (or `number-lines`) class will cause the lines
2264+of the code block to be numbered, starting with `1` or the value
2265+of the `startFrom` attribute. The `lineAnchors` (or
2266+`line-anchors`) class will cause the lines to be clickable
2267+anchors in HTML output.
29582268
2959− input formats
2960− : `latex`, `textile`, `html` (environments, `\ref`, and
2961− `\eqref` only), `ipynb`
2269+A shortcut form can also be used for specifying the language of
2270+the code block:
29622271
2963− output formats
2964− : `textile`, `commonmark`
2272+ ```haskell
2273+ qsort [] = []
2274+ ```
29652275
2966− Note: as applied to `ipynb`, `raw_html` and `raw_tex` affect not
2967− only raw TeX in markdown cells, but data with mime type
2968− `text/html` in output cells. Since the `ipynb` reader attempts
2969− to preserve the richest possible outputs when several options
2970− are given, you will get best results if you disable `raw_html`
2971− and `raw_tex` when converting to formats like `docx` which don't
2972− allow raw `html` or `tex`.
2276+This is equivalent to:
29732277
2974−- [`native_divs`](#extension-native_divs) causes HTML `div`
2975− elements to be parsed as native pandoc Div blocks.
2976− If you want them to be parsed as raw HTML, use
2977− `-f html-native_divs+raw_html`.
2278+ ``` {.haskell}
2279+ qsort [] = []
2280+ ```
29782281
2979−- [`native_spans`](#extension-native_spans) causes HTML `span`
2980− elements to be parsed as native pandoc Span inlines.
2981− If you want them to be parsed as raw HTML, use
2982− `-f html-native_spans+raw_html`. If you want to drop all
2983− `div`s and `span`s when converting HTML to Markdown, you
2984− can use `pandoc -f html-native_divs-native_spans -t markdown`.
2282+If the `fenced_code_attributes` extension is disabled, but
2283+input contains class attribute(s) for the code block, the first
2284+class attribute will be printed after the opening fence as a bare
2285+word.
29852286
2986−## Literate Haskell support
2287+To prevent all highlighting, use the `--no-highlight` flag.
2288+To set the highlighting style, use `--highlight-style`.
2289+For more information on highlighting, see [Syntax highlighting],
2290+below.
29872291
2988−#### Extension: `literate_haskell` ####
2292+Line blocks
2293+-----------
29892294
2990−Treat the document as literate Haskell source.
2295+#### Extension: `line_blocks` ####
29912296
2992−This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
2297+A line block is a sequence of lines beginning with a vertical bar (`|`)
2298+followed by a space. The division into lines will be preserved in
2299+the output, as will any leading spaces; otherwise, the lines will
2300+be formatted as Markdown. This is useful for verse and addresses:
29932301
2994−input formats
2995−: `markdown`, `rst`, `latex`
2302+ | The limerick packs laughs anatomical
2303+ | In space that is quite economical.
2304+ | But the good ones I've seen
2305+ | So seldom are clean
2306+ | And the clean ones so seldom are comical
29962307
2997−output formats
2998−: `markdown`, `rst`, `latex`, `html`
2308+ | 200 Main St.
2309+ | Berkeley, CA 94718
29992310
3000−If you append `+lhs` (or `+literate_haskell`) to one of the formats
3001−above, pandoc will treat the document as literate Haskell source.
3002−This means that
2311+The lines can be hard-wrapped if needed, but the continuation
2312+line must begin with a space.
30032313
3004− - In Markdown input, "bird track" sections will be parsed as Haskell
3005− code rather than block quotations. Text between `\begin{code}`
3006− and `\end{code}` will also be treated as Haskell code. For
3007− ATX-style headings the character '=' will be used instead of '#'.
2314+ | The Right Honorable Most Venerable and Righteous Samuel L.
2315+ Constable, Jr.
2316+ | 200 Main St.
2317+ | Berkeley, CA 94718
30082318
3009− - In Markdown output, code blocks with classes `haskell` and `literate`
3010− will be rendered using bird tracks, and block quotations will be
3011− indented one space, so they will not be treated as Haskell code.
3012− In addition, headings will be rendered setext-style (with underlines)
3013− rather than ATX-style (with '#' characters). (This is because ghc
3014− treats '#' characters in column 1 as introducing line numbers.)
2319+This syntax is borrowed from [reStructuredText].
30152320
3016− - In restructured text input, "bird track" sections will be parsed
3017− as Haskell code.
2321+Lists
2322+-----
30182323
3019− - In restructured text output, code blocks with class `haskell` will
3020− be rendered using bird tracks.
2324+### Bullet lists ###
30212325
3022− - In LaTeX input, text in `code` environments will be parsed as
3023− Haskell code.
2326+A bullet list is a list of bulleted list items. A bulleted list
2327+item begins with a bullet (`*`, `+`, or `-`). Here is a simple
2328+example:
30242329
3025− - In LaTeX output, code blocks with class `haskell` will be rendered
3026− inside `code` environments.
2330+ * one
2331+ * two
2332+ * three
30272333
3028− - In HTML output, code blocks with class `haskell` will be rendered
3029− with class `literatehaskell` and bird tracks.
2334+This will produce a "compact" list. If you want a "loose" list, in which
2335+each item is formatted as a paragraph, put spaces between the items:
30302336
3031−Examples:
2337+ * one
30322338
3033− pandoc -f markdown+lhs -t html
2339+ * two
30342340
3035−reads literate Haskell source formatted with Markdown conventions and writes
3036−ordinary HTML (without bird tracks).
2341+ * three
30372342
3038− pandoc -f markdown+lhs -t html+lhs
2343+The bullets need not be flush with the left margin; they may be
2344+indented one, two, or three spaces. The bullet must be followed
2345+by whitespace.
30392346
3040−writes HTML with the Haskell code in bird tracks, so it can be copied
3041−and pasted as literate Haskell source.
2347+List items look best if subsequent lines are flush with the first
2348+line (after the bullet):
30422349
3043−Note that GHC expects the bird tracks in the first column, so indented
3044−literate code blocks (e.g. inside an itemized environment) will not be
3045−picked up by the Haskell compiler.
2350+ * here is my first
2351+ list item.
2352+ * and my second.
30462353
3047−## Other extensions
2354+But Markdown also allows a "lazy" format:
30482355
3049−#### Extension: `empty_paragraphs` ####
2356+ * here is my first
2357+ list item.
2358+ * and my second.
30502359
3051−Allows empty paragraphs. By default empty paragraphs are
3052−omitted.
2360+### Block content in list items ###
30532361
3054−This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
2362+A list item may contain multiple paragraphs and other block-level
2363+content. However, subsequent paragraphs must be preceded by a blank line
2364+and indented to line up with the first non-space content after
2365+the list marker.
30552366
3056−input formats
3057−: `docx`, `html`
2367+ * First paragraph.
30582368
3059−output formats
3060−: `docx`, `odt`, `opendocument`, `html`
2369+ Continued.
30612370
3062−#### Extension: `native_numbering` ####
2371+ * Second paragraph. With a code block, which must be indented
2372+ eight spaces:
30632373
3064−Enables native numbering of figures and tables. Enumeration
3065−starts at 1.
2374+ { code }
30662375
3067−This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
3068−
3069−output formats
3070−: `odt`, `opendocument`
2376+Exception: if the list marker is followed by an indented code
2377+block, which must begin 5 spaces after the list marker, then
2378+subsequent paragraphs must begin two columns after the last
2379+character of the list marker:
30712380
3072−#### Extension: `xrefs_name` ####
2381+ * code
30732382
3074−Links to headings, figures and tables inside the document are
3075−substituted with cross-references that will use the name or caption
3076−of the referenced item. The original link text is replaced once
3077−the generated document is refreshed. This extension can be combined
3078−with `xrefs_number` in which case numbers will appear before the
3079−name.
2383+ continuation paragraph
30802384
3081−Text in cross-references is only made consistent with the referenced
3082−item once the document has been refreshed.
2385+List items may include other lists. In this case the preceding blank
2386+line is optional. The nested list must be indented to line up with
2387+the first non-space character after the list marker of the
2388+containing list item.
30832389
3084−This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
2390+ * fruits
2391+ + apples
2392+ - macintosh
2393+ - red delicious
2394+ + pears
2395+ + peaches
2396+ * vegetables
2397+ + broccoli
2398+ + chard
30852399
3086−output formats
3087−: `odt`, `opendocument`
2400+As noted above, Markdown allows you to write list items "lazily," instead of
2401+indenting continuation lines. However, if there are multiple paragraphs or
2402+other blocks in a list item, the first line of each must be indented.
30882403
3089−#### Extension: `xrefs_number` ####
2404+ + A lazy, lazy, list
2405+ item.
30902406
3091−Links to headings, figures and tables inside the document are
3092−substituted with cross-references that will use the number
3093−of the referenced item. The original link text is discarded.
3094−This extension can be combined with `xrefs_name` in which case
3095−the name or caption numbers will appear after the number.
2407+ + Another one; this looks
2408+ bad but is legal.
30962409
3097−For the `xrefs_number` to be useful heading numbers must be enabled
3098−in the generated document, also table and figure captions must be enabled
3099−using for example the `native_numbering` extension.
2410+ Second paragraph of second
2411+ list item.
31002412
3101−Numbers in cross-references are only visible in the final document once
3102−it has been refreshed.
2413+### Ordered lists ###
31032414
3104−This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
2415+Ordered lists work just like bulleted lists, except that the items
2416+begin with enumerators rather than bullets.
31052417
3106−output formats
3107−: `odt`, `opendocument`
2418+In standard Markdown, enumerators are decimal numbers followed
2419+by a period and a space. The numbers themselves are ignored, so
2420+there is no difference between this list:
31082421
3109−#### Extension: `styles` #### {#ext-styles}
2422+ 1. one
2423+ 2. two
2424+ 3. three
31102425
3111−When converting from docx, read all docx styles as divs (for
3112−paragraph styles) and spans (for character styles) regardless
3113−of whether pandoc understands the meaning of these styles.
3114−This can be used with [docx custom styles](#custom-styles).
3115−Disabled by default.
2426+and this one:
31162427
3117−input formats
3118−: `docx`
2428+ 5. one
2429+ 7. two
2430+ 1. three
31192431
3120−#### Extension: `amuse` ####
2432+#### Extension: `fancy_lists` ####
31212433
3122−In the `muse` input format, this enables Text::Amuse
3123−extensions to Emacs Muse markup.
2434+Unlike standard Markdown, pandoc allows ordered list items to be marked
2435+with uppercase and lowercase letters and roman numerals, in addition to
2436+Arabic numerals. List markers may be enclosed in parentheses or followed by a
2437+single right-parentheses or period. They must be separated from the
2438+text that follows by at least one space, and, if the list marker is a
2439+capital letter with a period, by at least two spaces.[^2]
31242440
3125−#### Extension: `raw_markdown` ####
2441+[^2]: The point of this rule is to ensure that normal paragraphs
2442+ starting with people's initials, like
31262443
3127−In the `ipynb` input format, this causes Markdown cells
3128−to be included as raw Markdown blocks (allowing lossless
3129−round-tripping) rather than being parsed. Use this only
3130−when you are targeting `ipynb` or a markdown-based
3131−output format.
2444+ B. Russell was an English philosopher.
31322445
3133−#### Extension: `citations` {#org-citations}
2446+ do not get treated as list items.
31342447
3135−Some aspects of [Pandoc's Markdown citation syntax](#citations)
3136−are also accepted in `org` input.
2448+ This rule will not prevent
31372449
3138−#### Extension: `element_citations` ####
2450+ (C) 2007 Joe Smith
31392451
3140−In the `jats` output formats, this causes reference items to
3141−be replaced with `<element-citation>` elements. These
3142−elements are not influenced by CSL styles, but all information
3143−on the item is included in tags.
2452+ from being interpreted as a list item. In this case, a backslash
2453+ escape can be used:
31442454
3145−#### Extension: `ntb` ####
2455+ (C\) 2007 Joe Smith
31462456
3147−In the `context` output format this enables the use of [Natural Tables
3148−(TABLE)](https://wiki.contextgarden.net/TABLE) instead of the default
3149−[Extreme Tables (xtables)](https://wiki.contextgarden.net/xtables).
3150−Natural tables allow more fine-grained global customization but come
3151−at a performance penalty compared to extreme tables.
2457+The `fancy_lists` extension also allows '`#`' to be used as an
2458+ordered list marker in place of a numeral:
31522459
2460+ #. one
2461+ #. two
31532462
3154−# Pandoc's Markdown
2463+#### Extension: `startnum` ####
31552464
3156−Pandoc understands an extended and slightly revised version of
3157−John Gruber's [Markdown] syntax. This document explains the syntax,
3158−noting differences from standard Markdown. Except where noted, these
3159−differences can be suppressed by using the `markdown_strict` format instead
3160−of `markdown`. Extensions can be enabled or disabled to specify the
3161−behavior more granularly. They are described in the following. See also
3162−[Extensions] above, for extensions that work also on other formats.
2465+Pandoc also pays attention to the type of list marker used, and to the
2466+starting number, and both of these are preserved where possible in the
2467+output format. Thus, the following yields a list with numbers followed
2468+by a single parenthesis, starting with 9, and a sublist with lowercase
2469+roman numerals:
31632470
3164−## Philosophy
2471+ 9) Ninth
2472+ 10) Tenth
2473+ 11) Eleventh
2474+ i. subone
2475+ ii. subtwo
2476+ iii. subthree
31652477
3166−Markdown is designed to be easy to write, and, even more importantly,
3167−easy to read:
2478+Pandoc will start a new list each time a different type of list
2479+marker is used. So, the following will create three lists:
31682480
3169−> A Markdown-formatted document should be publishable as-is, as plain
3170−> text, without looking like it's been marked up with tags or formatting
3171−> instructions.
3172−> -- [John Gruber](https://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/syntax#philosophy)
2481+ (2) Two
2482+ (5) Three
2483+ 1. Four
2484+ * Five
31732485
3174−This principle has guided pandoc's decisions in finding syntax for
3175−tables, footnotes, and other extensions.
2486+If default list markers are desired, use `#.`:
31762487
3177−There is, however, one respect in which pandoc's aims are different
3178−from the original aims of Markdown. Whereas Markdown was originally
3179−designed with HTML generation in mind, pandoc is designed for multiple
3180−output formats. Thus, while pandoc allows the embedding of raw HTML,
3181−it discourages it, and provides other, non-HTMLish ways of representing
3182−important document elements like definition lists, tables, mathematics, and
3183−footnotes.
2488+ #. one
2489+ #. two
2490+ #. three
31842491
3185−## Paragraphs
31862492
3187−A paragraph is one or more lines of text followed by one or more blank lines.
3188−Newlines are treated as spaces, so you can reflow your paragraphs as you like.
3189−If you need a hard line break, put two or more spaces at the end of a line.
2493+### Definition lists ###
31902494
3191−#### Extension: `escaped_line_breaks` ####
2495+#### Extension: `definition_lists` ####
31922496
3193−A backslash followed by a newline is also a hard line break.
3194−Note: in multiline and grid table cells, this is the only way
3195−to create a hard line break, since trailing spaces in the cells
3196−are ignored.
2497+Pandoc supports definition lists, using the syntax of
2498+[PHP Markdown Extra] with some extensions.[^3]
31972499
3198−## Headings
2500+ Term 1
31992501
3200−There are two kinds of headings: Setext and ATX.
2502+ : Definition 1
32012503
3202−### Setext-style headings ###
2504+ Term 2 with *inline markup*
32032505
3204−A setext-style heading is a line of text "underlined" with a row of `=` signs
3205−(for a level-one heading) or `-` signs (for a level-two heading):
2506+ : Definition 2
32062507
3207− A level-one heading
3208− ===================
2508+ { some code, part of Definition 2 }
32092509
3210− A level-two heading
3211− -------------------
2510+ Third paragraph of definition 2.
32122511
3213−The heading text can contain inline formatting, such as emphasis (see
3214−[Inline formatting], below).
2512+Each term must fit on one line, which may optionally be followed by
2513+a blank line, and must be followed by one or more definitions.
2514+A definition begins with a colon or tilde, which may be indented one
2515+or two spaces.
32152516
2517+A term may have multiple definitions, and each definition may consist of one or
2518+more block elements (paragraph, code block, list, etc.), each indented four
2519+spaces or one tab stop. The body of the definition (including the first line,
2520+aside from the colon or tilde) should be indented four spaces. However,
2521+as with other Markdown lists, you can "lazily" omit indentation except
2522+at the beginning of a paragraph or other block element:
32162523
3217−### ATX-style headings ###
2524+ Term 1
32182525
3219−An ATX-style heading consists of one to six `#` signs and a line of
3220−text, optionally followed by any number of `#` signs. The number of
3221−`#` signs at the beginning of the line is the heading level:
2526+ : Definition
2527+ with lazy continuation.
32222528
3223− ## A level-two heading
2529+ Second paragraph of the definition.
32242530
3225− ### A level-three heading ###
2531+If you leave space before the definition (as in the example above),
2532+the text of the definition will be treated as a paragraph. In some
2533+output formats, this will mean greater spacing between term/definition
2534+pairs. For a more compact definition list, omit the space before the
2535+definition:
32262536
3227−As with setext-style headings, the heading text can contain formatting:
2537+ Term 1
2538+ ~ Definition 1
32282539
3229− # A level-one heading with a [link](/url) and *emphasis*
2540+ Term 2
2541+ ~ Definition 2a
2542+ ~ Definition 2b
32302543
3231−#### Extension: `blank_before_header` ####
2544+Note that space between items in a definition list is required.
2545+(A variant that loosens this requirement, but disallows "lazy"
2546+hard wrapping, can be activated with `compact_definition_lists`: see
2547+[Non-pandoc extensions], below.)
32322548
3233−Standard Markdown syntax does not require a blank line before a heading.
3234−Pandoc does require this (except, of course, at the beginning of the
3235−document). The reason for the requirement is that it is all too easy for a
3236−`#` to end up at the beginning of a line by accident (perhaps through line
3237−wrapping). Consider, for example:
2549+[^3]: I have been influenced by the suggestions of [David Wheeler](http://www.justatheory.com/computers/markup/modest-markdown-proposal.html).
32382550
3239− I like several of their flavors of ice cream:
3240− #22, for example, and #5.
2551+### Numbered example lists ###
32412552
3242−#### Extension: `space_in_atx_header` ####
2553+#### Extension: `example_lists` ####
32432554
3244−Many Markdown implementations do not require a space between the
3245−opening `#`s of an ATX heading and the heading text, so that
3246−`#5 bolt` and `#hashtag` count as headings. With this extension,
3247−pandoc does require the space.
2555+The special list marker `@` can be used for sequentially numbered
2556+examples. The first list item with a `@` marker will be numbered '1',
2557+the next '2', and so on, throughout the document. The numbered examples
2558+need not occur in a single list; each new list using `@` will take up
2559+where the last stopped. So, for example:
32482560
3249−### Heading identifiers ###
2561+ (@) My first example will be numbered (1).
2562+ (@) My second example will be numbered (2).
32502563
3251−See also the [`auto_identifiers`
3252−extension](#extension-auto_identifiers) above.
2564+ Explanation of examples.
32532565
3254−#### Extension: `header_attributes` ####
2566+ (@) My third example will be numbered (3).
32552567
3256−Headings can be assigned attributes using this syntax at the end
3257−of the line containing the heading text:
2568+Numbered examples can be labeled and referred to elsewhere in the
2569+document:
32582570
3259− {#identifier .class .class key=value key=value}
2571+ (@good) This is a good example.
32602572
3261−Thus, for example, the following headings will all be assigned the identifier
3262−`foo`:
2573+ As (@good) illustrates, ...
32632574
3264− # My heading {#foo}
2575+The label can be any string of alphanumeric characters, underscores,
2576+or hyphens.
32652577
3266− ## My heading ## {#foo}
2578+Note: continuation paragraphs in example lists must always
2579+be indented four spaces, regardless of the length of the
2580+list marker. That is, example lists always behave as if the
2581+`four_space_rule` extension is set. This is because example
2582+labels tend to be long, and indenting content to the
2583+first non-space character after the label would be awkward.
32672584
3268− My other heading {#foo}
3269− ---------------
2585+### Compact and loose lists ###
32702586
3271−(This syntax is compatible with [PHP Markdown Extra].)
2587+Pandoc behaves differently from `Markdown.pl` on some "edge
2588+cases" involving lists. Consider this source:
32722589
3273−Note that although this syntax allows assignment of classes and key/value
3274−attributes, writers generally don't use all of this information. Identifiers,
3275−classes, and key/value attributes are used in HTML and HTML-based formats such
3276−as EPUB and slidy. Identifiers are used for labels and link anchors in the
3277−LaTeX, ConTeXt, Textile, Jira markup, and AsciiDoc writers.
2590+ + First
2591+ + Second:
2592+ - Fee
2593+ - Fie
2594+ - Foe
32782595
3279−Headings with the class `unnumbered` will not be numbered, even if
3280−`--number-sections` is specified. A single hyphen (`-`) in an attribute
3281−context is equivalent to `.unnumbered`, and preferable in non-English
3282−documents. So,
2596+ + Third
32832597
3284− # My heading {-}
2598+Pandoc transforms this into a "compact list" (with no `<p>` tags around
2599+"First", "Second", or "Third"), while Markdown puts `<p>` tags around
2600+"Second" and "Third" (but not "First"), because of the blank space
2601+around "Third". Pandoc follows a simple rule: if the text is followed by
2602+a blank line, it is treated as a paragraph. Since "Second" is followed
2603+by a list, and not a blank line, it isn't treated as a paragraph. The
2604+fact that the list is followed by a blank line is irrelevant. (Note:
2605+Pandoc works this way even when the `markdown_strict` format is specified. This
2606+behavior is consistent with the official Markdown syntax description,
2607+even though it is different from that of `Markdown.pl`.)
32852608
3286−is just the same as
32872609
3288− # My heading {.unnumbered}
2610+### Ending a list ###
32892611
3290−If the `unlisted` class is present in addition to `unnumbered`,
3291−the heading will not be included in a table of contents.
3292−(Currently this feature is only implemented for certain
3293−formats: those based on LaTeX and HTML, PowerPoint, and RTF.)
2612+What if you want to put an indented code block after a list?
32942613
3295−#### Extension: `implicit_header_references` ####
2614+ - item one
2615+ - item two
32962616
3297−Pandoc behaves as if reference links have been defined for each heading.
3298−So, to link to a heading
2617+ { my code block }
32992618
3300− # Heading identifiers in HTML
2619+Trouble! Here pandoc (like other Markdown implementations) will treat
2620+`{ my code block }` as the second paragraph of item two, and not as
2621+a code block.
33012622
3302−you can simply write
2623+To "cut off" the list after item two, you can insert some non-indented
2624+content, like an HTML comment, which won't produce visible output in
2625+any format:
33032626
3304− [Heading identifiers in HTML]
2627+ - item one
2628+ - item two
33052629
3306−or
2630+ <!-- end of list -->
33072631
3308− [Heading identifiers in HTML][]
2632+ { my code block }
33092633
3310−or
2634+You can use the same trick if you want two consecutive lists instead
2635+of one big list:
33112636
3312− [the section on heading identifiers][heading identifiers in
3313− HTML]
2637+ 1. one
2638+ 2. two
2639+ 3. three
33142640
3315−instead of giving the identifier explicitly:
2641+ <!-- -->
33162642
3317− [Heading identifiers in HTML](#heading-identifiers-in-html)
2643+ 1. uno
2644+ 2. dos
2645+ 3. tres
33182646
3319−If there are multiple headings with identical text, the corresponding
3320−reference will link to the first one only, and you will need to use explicit
3321−links to link to the others, as described above.
2647+Horizontal rules
2648+----------------
33222649
3323−Like regular reference links, these references are case-insensitive.
2650+A line containing a row of three or more `*`, `-`, or `_` characters
2651+(optionally separated by spaces) produces a horizontal rule:
33242652
3325−Explicit link reference definitions always take priority over
3326−implicit heading references. So, in the following example, the
3327−link will point to `bar`, not to `#foo`:
2653+ * * * *
33282654
3329− # Foo
2655+ ---------------
33302656
3331− [foo]: bar
33322657
3333− See [foo]
2658+Tables
2659+------
33342660
3335−## Block quotations
2661+Four kinds of tables may be used. The first three kinds presuppose the use of
2662+a fixed-width font, such as Courier. The fourth kind can be used with
2663+proportionally spaced fonts, as it does not require lining up columns.
33362664
3337−Markdown uses email conventions for quoting blocks of text.
3338−A block quotation is one or more paragraphs or other block elements
3339−(such as lists or headings), with each line preceded by a `>` character
3340−and an optional space. (The `>` need not start at the left margin, but
3341−it should not be indented more than three spaces.)
2665+#### Extension: `table_captions` ####
33422666
3343− > This is a block quote. This
3344− > paragraph has two lines.
3345− >
3346− > 1. This is a list inside a block quote.
3347− > 2. Second item.
3348−
3349−A "lazy" form, which requires the `>` character only on the first
3350−line of each block, is also allowed:
3351−
3352− > This is a block quote. This
3353− paragraph has two lines.
3354−
3355− > 1. This is a list inside a block quote.
3356− 2. Second item.
3357−
3358−Among the block elements that can be contained in a block quote are
3359−other block quotes. That is, block quotes can be nested:
3360−
3361− > This is a block quote.
3362− >
3363− > > A block quote within a block quote.
3364−
3365−If the `>` character is followed by an optional space, that space
3366−will be considered part of the block quote marker and not part of
3367−the indentation of the contents. Thus, to put an indented code
3368−block in a block quote, you need five spaces after the `>`:
3369−
3370− > code
3371−
3372−#### Extension: `blank_before_blockquote` ####
3373−
3374−Standard Markdown syntax does not require a blank line before a
3375−block quote. Pandoc does require this (except, of course, at
3376−the beginning of the document). The reason for the requirement
3377−is that it is all too easy for a `>` to end up at the beginning
3378−of a line by accident (perhaps through line wrapping). So,
3379−unless the `markdown_strict` format is used, the following does
3380−not produce a nested block quote in pandoc:
3381−
3382− > This is a block quote.
3383− >> Nested.
3384−
3385−
3386−## Verbatim (code) blocks
3387−
3388−### Indented code blocks ###
3389−
3390−A block of text indented four spaces (or one tab) is treated as verbatim
3391−text: that is, special characters do not trigger special formatting,
3392−and all spaces and line breaks are preserved. For example,
3393−
3394− if (a > 3) {
3395− moveShip(5 * gravity, DOWN);
3396− }
3397−
3398−The initial (four space or one tab) indentation is not considered part
3399−of the verbatim text, and is removed in the output.
3400−
3401−Note: blank lines in the verbatim text need not begin with four spaces.
3402−
3403−
3404−### Fenced code blocks ###
3405−
3406−#### Extension: `fenced_code_blocks` ####
3407−
3408−In addition to standard indented code blocks, pandoc supports
3409−*fenced* code blocks. These begin with a row of three or more
3410−tildes (`~`) and end with a row of tildes that must be at least as long as
3411−the starting row. Everything between these lines is treated as code. No
3412−indentation is necessary:
3413−
3414− ~~~~~~~
3415− if (a > 3) {
3416− moveShip(5 * gravity, DOWN);
3417− }
3418− ~~~~~~~
3419−
3420−Like regular code blocks, fenced code blocks must be separated
3421−from surrounding text by blank lines.
3422−
3423−If the code itself contains a row of tildes or backticks, just use a longer
3424−row of tildes or backticks at the start and end:
3425−
3426− ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3427− ~~~~~~~~~~
3428− code including tildes
3429− ~~~~~~~~~~
3430− ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3431−
3432−#### Extension: `backtick_code_blocks` ####
3433−
3434−Same as `fenced_code_blocks`, but uses backticks (`` ` ``) instead of tildes
3435−(`~`).
3436−
3437−#### Extension: `fenced_code_attributes` ####
3438−
3439−Optionally, you may attach attributes to fenced or backtick code block using
3440−this syntax:
3441−
3442− ~~~~ {#mycode .haskell .numberLines startFrom="100"}
3443− qsort [] = []
3444− qsort (x:xs) = qsort (filter (< x) xs) ++ [x] ++
3445− qsort (filter (>= x) xs)
3446− ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3447−
3448−Here `mycode` is an identifier, `haskell` and `numberLines` are
3449−classes, and `startFrom` is an attribute with value `100`. Some
3450−output formats can use this information to do syntax
3451−highlighting. Currently, the only output formats that uses this
3452−information are HTML, LaTeX, Docx, Ms, and PowerPoint. If
3453−highlighting is supported for your output format and language,
3454−then the code block above will appear highlighted, with numbered
3455−lines. (To see which languages are supported, type `pandoc
3456−--list-highlight-languages`.) Otherwise, the code block above
3457−will appear as follows:
3458−
3459− <pre id="mycode" class="haskell numberLines" startFrom="100">
3460− <code>
3461− ...
3462− </code>
3463− </pre>
3464−
3465−The `numberLines` (or `number-lines`) class will cause the lines
3466−of the code block to be numbered, starting with `1` or the value
3467−of the `startFrom` attribute. The `lineAnchors` (or
3468−`line-anchors`) class will cause the lines to be clickable
3469−anchors in HTML output.
3470−
3471−A shortcut form can also be used for specifying the language of
3472−the code block:
3473−
3474− ```haskell
3475− qsort [] = []
3476− ```
3477−
3478−This is equivalent to:
3479−
3480− ``` {.haskell}
3481− qsort [] = []
3482− ```
3483−
3484−If the `fenced_code_attributes` extension is disabled, but
3485−input contains class attribute(s) for the code block, the first
3486−class attribute will be printed after the opening fence as a bare
3487−word.
3488−
3489−To prevent all highlighting, use the `--no-highlight` flag.
3490−To set the highlighting style, use `--highlight-style`.
3491−For more information on highlighting, see [Syntax highlighting],
3492−below.
3493−
3494−## Line blocks
3495−
3496−#### Extension: `line_blocks` ####
3497−
3498−A line block is a sequence of lines beginning with a vertical bar (`|`)
3499−followed by a space. The division into lines will be preserved in
3500−the output, as will any leading spaces; otherwise, the lines will
3501−be formatted as Markdown. This is useful for verse and addresses:
3502−
3503− | The limerick packs laughs anatomical
3504− | In space that is quite economical.
3505− | But the good ones I've seen
3506− | So seldom are clean
3507− | And the clean ones so seldom are comical
3508−
3509− | 200 Main St.
3510− | Berkeley, CA 94718
3511−
3512−The lines can be hard-wrapped if needed, but the continuation
3513−line must begin with a space.
3514−
3515− | The Right Honorable Most Venerable and Righteous Samuel L.
3516− Constable, Jr.
3517− | 200 Main St.
3518− | Berkeley, CA 94718
3519−
3520−Inline formatting (such as emphasis) is allowed in the content,
3521−but not block-level formatting (such as block quotes or lists).
3522−
3523−This syntax is borrowed from [reStructuredText].
3524−
3525−## Lists
3526−
3527−### Bullet lists ###
3528−
3529−A bullet list is a list of bulleted list items. A bulleted list
3530−item begins with a bullet (`*`, `+`, or `-`). Here is a simple
3531−example:
3532−
3533− * one
3534− * two
3535− * three
3536−
3537−This will produce a "compact" list. If you want a "loose" list, in which
3538−each item is formatted as a paragraph, put spaces between the items:
3539−
3540− * one
3541−
3542− * two
3543−
3544− * three
3545−
3546−The bullets need not be flush with the left margin; they may be
3547−indented one, two, or three spaces. The bullet must be followed
3548−by whitespace.
3549−
3550−List items look best if subsequent lines are flush with the first
3551−line (after the bullet):
3552−
3553− * here is my first
3554− list item.
3555− * and my second.
3556−
3557−But Markdown also allows a "lazy" format:
3558−
3559− * here is my first
3560− list item.
3561− * and my second.
3562−
3563−### Block content in list items ###
3564−
3565−A list item may contain multiple paragraphs and other block-level
3566−content. However, subsequent paragraphs must be preceded by a blank line
3567−and indented to line up with the first non-space content after
3568−the list marker.
3569−
3570− * First paragraph.
3571−
3572− Continued.
3573−
3574− * Second paragraph. With a code block, which must be indented
3575− eight spaces:
3576−
3577− { code }
3578−
3579−Exception: if the list marker is followed by an indented code
3580−block, which must begin 5 spaces after the list marker, then
3581−subsequent paragraphs must begin two columns after the last
3582−character of the list marker:
3583−
3584− * code
3585−
3586− continuation paragraph
3587−
3588−List items may include other lists. In this case the preceding blank
3589−line is optional. The nested list must be indented to line up with
3590−the first non-space character after the list marker of the
3591−containing list item.
3592−
3593− * fruits
3594− + apples
3595− - macintosh
3596− - red delicious
3597− + pears
3598− + peaches
3599− * vegetables
3600− + broccoli
3601− + chard
3602−
3603−As noted above, Markdown allows you to write list items "lazily," instead of
3604−indenting continuation lines. However, if there are multiple paragraphs or
3605−other blocks in a list item, the first line of each must be indented.
3606−
3607− + A lazy, lazy, list
3608− item.
3609−
3610− + Another one; this looks
3611− bad but is legal.
3612−
3613− Second paragraph of second
3614− list item.
3615−
3616−### Ordered lists ###
3617−
3618−Ordered lists work just like bulleted lists, except that the items
3619−begin with enumerators rather than bullets.
3620−
3621−In standard Markdown, enumerators are decimal numbers followed
3622−by a period and a space. The numbers themselves are ignored, so
3623−there is no difference between this list:
3624−
3625− 1. one
3626− 2. two
3627− 3. three
3628−
3629−and this one:
3630−
3631− 5. one
3632− 7. two
3633− 1. three
3634−
3635−#### Extension: `fancy_lists` ####
3636−
3637−Unlike standard Markdown, pandoc allows ordered list items to be marked
3638−with uppercase and lowercase letters and roman numerals, in addition to
3639−Arabic numerals. List markers may be enclosed in parentheses or followed by a
3640−single right-parentheses or period. They must be separated from the
3641−text that follows by at least one space, and, if the list marker is a
3642−capital letter with a period, by at least two spaces.[^2]
3643−
3644−[^2]: The point of this rule is to ensure that normal paragraphs
3645− starting with people's initials, like
3646−
3647− B. Russell was an English philosopher.
3648−
3649− do not get treated as list items.
3650−
3651− This rule will not prevent
3652−
3653− (C) 2007 Joe Smith
3654−
3655− from being interpreted as a list item. In this case, a backslash
3656− escape can be used:
3657−
3658− (C\) 2007 Joe Smith
3659−
3660−The `fancy_lists` extension also allows '`#`' to be used as an
3661−ordered list marker in place of a numeral:
3662−
3663− #. one
3664− #. two
3665−
3666−#### Extension: `startnum` ####
3667−
3668−Pandoc also pays attention to the type of list marker used, and to the
3669−starting number, and both of these are preserved where possible in the
3670−output format. Thus, the following yields a list with numbers followed
3671−by a single parenthesis, starting with 9, and a sublist with lowercase
3672−roman numerals:
3673−
3674− 9) Ninth
3675− 10) Tenth
3676− 11) Eleventh
3677− i. subone
3678− ii. subtwo
3679− iii. subthree
3680−
3681−Pandoc will start a new list each time a different type of list
3682−marker is used. So, the following will create three lists:
3683−
3684− (2) Two
3685− (5) Three
3686− 1. Four
3687− * Five
3688−
3689−If default list markers are desired, use `#.`:
3690−
3691− #. one
3692− #. two
3693− #. three
3694−
3695−#### Extension: `task_lists` ####
3696−
3697−Pandoc supports task lists, using the syntax of GitHub-Flavored Markdown.
3698−
3699− - [ ] an unchecked task list item
3700− - [x] checked item
3701−
3702−### Definition lists ###
3703−
3704−#### Extension: `definition_lists` ####
3705−
3706−Pandoc supports definition lists, using the syntax of
3707−[PHP Markdown Extra] with some extensions.[^3]
3708−
3709− Term 1
3710−
3711− : Definition 1
3712−
3713− Term 2 with *inline markup*
3714−
3715− : Definition 2
3716−
3717− { some code, part of Definition 2 }
3718−
3719− Third paragraph of definition 2.
3720−
3721−Each term must fit on one line, which may optionally be followed by
3722−a blank line, and must be followed by one or more definitions.
3723−A definition begins with a colon or tilde, which may be indented one
3724−or two spaces.
3725−
3726−A term may have multiple definitions, and each definition may
3727−consist of one or more block elements (paragraph, code block,
3728−list, etc.), each indented four spaces or one tab stop. The
3729−body of the definition (including the first line, aside from the
3730−colon or tilde) should be indented four spaces. However, as with
3731−other Markdown lists, you can "lazily" omit indentation except
3732−at the beginning of a paragraph or other block element:
3733−
3734− Term 1
3735−
3736− : Definition
3737− with lazy continuation.
3738−
3739− Second paragraph of the definition.
3740−
3741−If you leave space before the definition (as in the example above),
3742−the text of the definition will be treated as a paragraph. In some
3743−output formats, this will mean greater spacing between term/definition
3744−pairs. For a more compact definition list, omit the space before the
3745−definition:
3746−
3747− Term 1
3748− ~ Definition 1
3749−
3750− Term 2
3751− ~ Definition 2a
3752− ~ Definition 2b
3753−
3754−Note that space between items in a definition list is required.
3755−(A variant that loosens this requirement, but disallows "lazy"
3756−hard wrapping, can be activated with `compact_definition_lists`: see
3757−[Non-default extensions], below.)
3758−
3759−[^3]: I have been influenced by the suggestions of [David
3760− Wheeler](https://justatheory.com/2009/02/modest-markdown-proposal/).
3761−
3762−### Numbered example lists ###
3763−
3764−#### Extension: `example_lists` ####
3765−
3766−The special list marker `@` can be used for sequentially numbered
3767−examples. The first list item with a `@` marker will be numbered '1',
3768−the next '2', and so on, throughout the document. The numbered examples
3769−need not occur in a single list; each new list using `@` will take up
3770−where the last stopped. So, for example:
3771−
3772− (@) My first example will be numbered (1).
3773− (@) My second example will be numbered (2).
3774−
3775− Explanation of examples.
3776−
3777− (@) My third example will be numbered (3).
3778−
3779−Numbered examples can be labeled and referred to elsewhere in the
3780−document:
3781−
3782− (@good) This is a good example.
3783−
3784− As (@good) illustrates, ...
3785−
3786−The label can be any string of alphanumeric characters, underscores,
3787−or hyphens.
3788−
3789−Note: continuation paragraphs in example lists must always
3790−be indented four spaces, regardless of the length of the
3791−list marker. That is, example lists always behave as if the
3792−`four_space_rule` extension is set. This is because example
3793−labels tend to be long, and indenting content to the
3794−first non-space character after the label would be awkward.
3795−
3796−
3797−### Ending a list ###
3798−
3799−What if you want to put an indented code block after a list?
3800−
3801− - item one
3802− - item two
3803−
3804− { my code block }
3805−
3806−Trouble! Here pandoc (like other Markdown implementations) will treat
3807−`{ my code block }` as the second paragraph of item two, and not as
3808−a code block.
3809−
3810−To "cut off" the list after item two, you can insert some non-indented
3811−content, like an HTML comment, which won't produce visible output in
3812−any format:
3813−
3814− - item one
3815− - item two
3816−
3817− <!-- end of list -->
3818−
3819− { my code block }
3820−
3821−You can use the same trick if you want two consecutive lists instead
3822−of one big list:
3823−
3824− 1. one
3825− 2. two
3826− 3. three
3827−
3828− <!-- -->
3829−
3830− 1. uno
3831− 2. dos
3832− 3. tres
3833−
3834−## Horizontal rules
3835−
3836−A line containing a row of three or more `*`, `-`, or `_` characters
3837−(optionally separated by spaces) produces a horizontal rule:
3838−
3839− * * * *
3840−
3841− ---------------
3842−
3843−
3844−## Tables
3845−
3846−Four kinds of tables may be used. The first three kinds presuppose the use of
3847−a fixed-width font, such as Courier. The fourth kind can be used with
3848−proportionally spaced fonts, as it does not require lining up columns.
3849−
3850−#### Extension: `table_captions` ####
3851−
3852−A caption may optionally be provided with all 4 kinds of tables (as
3853−illustrated in the examples below). A caption is a paragraph beginning
3854−with the string `Table:` (or just `:`), which will be stripped off.
3855−It may appear either before or after the table.
3856−
3857−#### Extension: `simple_tables` ####
3858−
3859−Simple tables look like this:
3860−
3861− Right Left Center Default
3862− ------- ------ ---------- -------
3863− 12 12 12 12
3864− 123 123 123 123
3865− 1 1 1 1
3866−
3867− Table: Demonstration of simple table syntax.
3868−
3869−The header and table rows must each fit on one line. Column
3870−alignments are determined by the position of the header text relative
3871−to the dashed line below it:[^4]
3872−
3873− - If the dashed line is flush with the header text on the right side
3874− but extends beyond it on the left, the column is right-aligned.
3875− - If the dashed line is flush with the header text on the left side
3876− but extends beyond it on the right, the column is left-aligned.
3877− - If the dashed line extends beyond the header text on both sides,
3878− the column is centered.
3879− - If the dashed line is flush with the header text on both sides,
3880− the default alignment is used (in most cases, this will be left).
3881−
3882−[^4]: This scheme is due to Michel Fortin, who proposed it on the
3883− [Markdown discussion list](http://six.pairlist.net/pipermail/markdown-discuss/2005-March/001097.html).
3884−
3885−The table must end with a blank line, or a line of dashes followed by
3886−a blank line.
3887−
3888−The column header row may be omitted, provided a dashed line is used
3889−to end the table. For example:
3890−
3891− ------- ------ ---------- -------
3892− 12 12 12 12
3893− 123 123 123 123
3894− 1 1 1 1
3895− ------- ------ ---------- -------
3896−
3897−When the header row is omitted, column alignments are determined on the basis
3898−of the first line of the table body. So, in the tables above, the columns
3899−would be right, left, center, and right aligned, respectively.
3900−
3901−#### Extension: `multiline_tables` ####
3902−
3903−Multiline tables allow header and table rows to span multiple lines
3904−of text (but cells that span multiple columns or rows of the table are
3905−not supported). Here is an example:
3906−
3907− -------------------------------------------------------------
3908− Centered Default Right Left
3909− Header Aligned Aligned Aligned
3910− ----------- ------- --------------- -------------------------
3911− First row 12.0 Example of a row that
3912− spans multiple lines.
3913−
3914− Second row 5.0 Here's another one. Note
3915− the blank line between
3916− rows.
3917− -------------------------------------------------------------
3918−
3919− Table: Here's the caption. It, too, may span
3920− multiple lines.
3921−
3922−These work like simple tables, but with the following differences:
3923−
3924− - They must begin with a row of dashes, before the header text
3925− (unless the header row is omitted).
3926− - They must end with a row of dashes, then a blank line.
3927− - The rows must be separated by blank lines.
3928−
3929−In multiline tables, the table parser pays attention to the widths of
3930−the columns, and the writers try to reproduce these relative widths in
3931−the output. So, if you find that one of the columns is too narrow in the
3932−output, try widening it in the Markdown source.
3933−
3934−The header may be omitted in multiline tables as well as simple tables:
3935−
3936− ----------- ------- --------------- -------------------------
3937− First row 12.0 Example of a row that
3938− spans multiple lines.
3939−
3940− Second row 5.0 Here's another one. Note
3941− the blank line between
3942− rows.
3943− ----------- ------- --------------- -------------------------
3944−
3945− : Here's a multiline table without a header.
3946−
3947−It is possible for a multiline table to have just one row, but the row
3948−should be followed by a blank line (and then the row of dashes that ends
3949−the table), or the table may be interpreted as a simple table.
3950−
3951−#### Extension: `grid_tables` ####
3952−
3953−Grid tables look like this:
3954−
3955− : Sample grid table.
3956−
3957− +---------------+---------------+--------------------+
3958− | Fruit | Price | Advantages |
3959− +===============+===============+====================+
3960− | Bananas | $1.34 | - built-in wrapper |
3961− | | | - bright color |
3962− +---------------+---------------+--------------------+
3963− | Oranges | $2.10 | - cures scurvy |
3964− | | | - tasty |
3965− +---------------+---------------+--------------------+
3966−
3967−The row of `=`s separates the header from the table body, and can be
3968−omitted for a headerless table. The cells of grid tables may contain
3969−arbitrary block elements (multiple paragraphs, code blocks, lists,
3970−etc.). Cells that span multiple columns or rows are not
3971−supported. Grid tables can be created easily using Emacs' table-mode
3972−(`M-x table-insert`).
3973−
3974−Alignments can be specified as with pipe tables, by putting
3975−colons at the boundaries of the separator line after the
3976−header:
3977−
3978− +---------------+---------------+--------------------+
3979− | Right | Left | Centered |
3980− +==============:+:==============+:==================:+
3981− | Bananas | $1.34 | built-in wrapper |
3982− +---------------+---------------+--------------------+
3983−
3984−For headerless tables, the colons go on the top line instead:
3985−
3986− +--------------:+:--------------+:------------------:+
3987− | Right | Left | Centered |
3988− +---------------+---------------+--------------------+
3989−
3990−##### Grid Table Limitations #####
3991−
3992−Pandoc does not support grid tables with row spans or column spans.
3993−This means that neither variable numbers of columns across rows nor
3994−variable numbers of rows across columns are supported by Pandoc.
3995−All grid tables must have the same number of columns in each row,
3996−and the same number of rows in each column. For example, the
3997−Docutils [sample grid tables] will not render as expected with
3998−Pandoc.
3999−
4000−[sample grid tables]: https://docutils.sourceforge.io/docs/ref/rst/restructuredtext.html#grid-tables
4001−
4002−
4003−#### Extension: `pipe_tables` ####
4004−
4005−Pipe tables look like this:
4006−
4007− | Right | Left | Default | Center |
4008− |------:|:-----|---------|:------:|
4009− | 12 | 12 | 12 | 12 |
4010− | 123 | 123 | 123 | 123 |
4011− | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
4012−
4013− : Demonstration of pipe table syntax.
4014−
4015−The syntax is identical to [PHP Markdown Extra tables]. The beginning and
4016−ending pipe characters are optional, but pipes are required between all
4017−columns. The colons indicate column alignment as shown. The header
4018−cannot be omitted. To simulate a headerless table, include a header
4019−with blank cells.
4020−
4021−Since the pipes indicate column boundaries, columns need not be vertically
4022−aligned, as they are in the above example. So, this is a perfectly
4023−legal (though ugly) pipe table:
4024−
4025− fruit| price
4026− -----|-----:
4027− apple|2.05
4028− pear|1.37
4029− orange|3.09
4030−
4031−The cells of pipe tables cannot contain block elements like paragraphs
4032−and lists, and cannot span multiple lines. If a pipe table contains a
4033−row whose Markdown content is wider than the column width (see
4034−`--columns`), then the table will take up the full text width and
4035−the cell contents will wrap, with the relative cell widths determined
4036−by the number of dashes in the line separating the table header from
4037−the table body. (For example `---|-` would make the first column 3/4
4038−and the second column 1/4 of the full text width.)
4039−On the other hand, if no lines are wider than column width, then
4040−cell contents will not be wrapped, and the cells will be sized
4041−to their contents.
4042−
4043−Note: pandoc also recognizes pipe tables of the following
4044−form, as can be produced by Emacs' orgtbl-mode:
4045−
4046− | One | Two |
4047− |-----+-------|
4048− | my | table |
4049− | is | nice |
4050−
4051−The difference is that `+` is used instead of `|`. Other orgtbl features
4052−are not supported. In particular, to get non-default column alignment,
4053−you'll need to add colons as above.
4054−
4055−[PHP Markdown Extra tables]: https://michelf.ca/projects/php-markdown/extra/#table
4056−
4057−## Metadata blocks
4058−
4059−#### Extension: `pandoc_title_block` ####
4060−
4061−If the file begins with a title block
4062−
4063− % title
4064− % author(s) (separated by semicolons)
4065− % date
4066−
4067−it will be parsed as bibliographic information, not regular text. (It
4068−will be used, for example, in the title of standalone LaTeX or HTML
4069−output.) The block may contain just a title, a title and an author,
4070−or all three elements. If you want to include an author but no
4071−title, or a title and a date but no author, you need a blank line:
4072−
4073−```
4074−%
4075−% Author
4076−```
4077−
4078−```
4079−% My title
4080−%
4081−% June 15, 2006
4082−```
4083−
4084−The title may occupy multiple lines, but continuation lines must
4085−begin with leading space, thus:
4086−
4087−```
4088−% My title
4089− on multiple lines
4090−```
4091−
4092−If a document has multiple authors, the authors may be put on
4093−separate lines with leading space, or separated by semicolons, or
4094−both. So, all of the following are equivalent:
4095−
4096−```
4097−% Author One
4098− Author Two
4099−```
4100−
4101−```
4102−% Author One; Author Two
4103−```
4104−
4105−```
4106−% Author One;
4107− Author Two
4108−```
4109−
4110−The date must fit on one line.
4111−
4112−All three metadata fields may contain standard inline formatting
4113−(italics, links, footnotes, etc.).
4114−
4115−Title blocks will always be parsed, but they will affect the output only
4116−when the `--standalone` (`-s`) option is chosen. In HTML output, titles
4117−will appear twice: once in the document head -- this is the title that
4118−will appear at the top of the window in a browser -- and once at the
4119−beginning of the document body. The title in the document head can have
4120−an optional prefix attached (`--title-prefix` or `-T` option). The title
4121−in the body appears as an H1 element with class "title", so it can be
4122−suppressed or reformatted with CSS. If a title prefix is specified with
4123−`-T` and no title block appears in the document, the title prefix will
4124−be used by itself as the HTML title.
4125−
4126−The man page writer extracts a title, man page section number, and
4127−other header and footer information from the title line. The title
4128−is assumed to be the first word on the title line, which may optionally
4129−end with a (single-digit) section number in parentheses. (There should
4130−be no space between the title and the parentheses.) Anything after
4131−this is assumed to be additional footer and header text. A single pipe
4132−character (`|`) should be used to separate the footer text from the header
4133−text. Thus,
4134−
4135− % PANDOC(1)
4136−
4137−will yield a man page with the title `PANDOC` and section 1.
4138−
4139− % PANDOC(1) Pandoc User Manuals
4140−
4141−will also have "Pandoc User Manuals" in the footer.
4142−
4143− % PANDOC(1) Pandoc User Manuals | Version 4.0
4144−
4145−will also have "Version 4.0" in the header.
4146−
4147−#### Extension: `yaml_metadata_block` ####
4148−
4149−A [YAML] metadata block is a valid YAML object, delimited by a line of three
4150−hyphens (`---`) at the top and a line of three hyphens (`---`) or three dots
4151−(`...`) at the bottom. A YAML metadata block may occur anywhere in the
4152−document, but if it is not at the beginning, it must be preceded by a blank
4153−line. (Note that, because of the way pandoc concatenates input files when
4154−several are provided, you may also keep the metadata in a separate YAML file
4155−and pass it to pandoc as an argument, along with your Markdown files:
4156−
4157− pandoc chap1.md chap2.md chap3.md metadata.yaml -s -o book.html
4158−
4159−Just be sure that the YAML file begins with `---` and ends with `---` or
4160−`...`.) Alternatively, you can use the `--metadata-file` option. Using
4161−that approach however, you cannot reference content (like footnotes)
4162−from the main markdown input document.
4163−
4164−Metadata will be taken from the fields of the YAML object and added to any
4165−existing document metadata. Metadata can contain lists and objects (nested
4166−arbitrarily), but all string scalars will be interpreted as Markdown. Fields
4167−with names ending in an underscore will be ignored by pandoc. (They may be
4168−given a role by external processors.) Field names must not be
4169−interpretable as YAML numbers or boolean values (so, for
4170−example, `yes`, `True`, and `15` cannot be used as field names).
4171−
4172−A document may contain multiple metadata blocks. If two
4173−metadata blocks attempt to set the same field, the value from
4174−the second block will be taken.
4175−
4176−When pandoc is used with `-t markdown` to create a Markdown document,
4177−a YAML metadata block will be produced only if the `-s/--standalone`
4178−option is used. All of the metadata will appear in a single block
4179−at the beginning of the document.
4180−
4181−Note that [YAML] escaping rules must be followed. Thus, for example,
4182−if a title contains a colon, it must be quoted, and if it contains a
4183−backslash escape, then it must be ensured that it is not treated as a
4184−[YAML escape sequence]. The pipe character (`|`) can be used to begin
4185−an indented block that will be interpreted literally, without need for
4186−escaping. This form is necessary when the field contains blank lines
4187−or block-level formatting:
4188−
4189− ---
4190− title: 'This is the title: it contains a colon'
4191− author:
4192− - Author One
4193− - Author Two
4194− keywords: [nothing, nothingness]
4195− abstract: |
4196− This is the abstract.
4197−
4198− It consists of two paragraphs.
4199− ...
4200−
4201−The literal block after the `|` must be indented relative to the
4202−line containing the `|`. If it is not, the YAML will be invalid
4203−and pandoc will not interpret it as metadata. For an overview
4204−of the complex rules governing YAML, see the [Wikipedia entry on
4205−YAML syntax].
4206−
4207−Template variables will be set automatically from the metadata. Thus, for
4208−example, in writing HTML, the variable `abstract` will be set to the HTML
4209−equivalent of the Markdown in the `abstract` field:
4210−
4211− <p>This is the abstract.</p>
4212− <p>It consists of two paragraphs.</p>
4213−
4214−Variables can contain arbitrary YAML structures, but the template must match
4215−this structure. The `author` variable in the default templates expects a
4216−simple list or string, but can be changed to support more complicated
4217−structures. The following combination, for example, would add an affiliation
4218−to the author if one is given:
4219−
4220− ---
4221− title: The document title
4222− author:
4223− - name: Author One
4224− affiliation: University of Somewhere
4225− - name: Author Two
4226− affiliation: University of Nowhere
4227− ...
4228−
4229−To use the structured authors in the example above, you would need a custom
4230−template:
4231−
4232− $for(author)$
4233− $if(author.name)$
4234− $author.name$$if(author.affiliation)$ ($author.affiliation$)$endif$
4235− $else$
4236− $author$
4237− $endif$
4238− $endfor$
4239−
4240−Raw content to include in the document's header may be specified
4241−using `header-includes`; however, it is important to mark up
4242−this content as raw code for a particular output format, using
4243−the [`raw_attribute` extension](#extension-raw_attribute)), or it
4244−will be interpreted as markdown. For example:
4245−
4246− header-includes:
4247− - |
4248− ```{=latex}
4249− \let\oldsection\section
4250− \renewcommand{\section}[1]{\clearpage\oldsection{#1}}
4251− ```
4252−
4253−Note: the `yaml_metadata_block` extension works with
4254−`commonmark` as well as `markdown` (and it is enabled by default
4255−in `gfm` and `commonmark_x`). However, in these formats the
4256−following restrictions apply:
4257−
4258−- The YAML metadata block must occur at the beginning of the
4259− document (and there can be only one). If multiple files are
4260− given as arguments to pandoc, only the first can be a YAML
4261− metadata block.
4262−
4263−- The leaf nodes of the YAML structure are parsed in isolation from
4264− each other and from the rest of the document. So, for
4265− example, you can't use a reference link in these contexts
4266− if the link definition is somewhere else in the document.
4267−
4268−[YAML escape sequence]: https://yaml.org/spec/1.2/spec.html#id2776092
4269−[Wikipedia entry on YAML syntax]: https://en.m.wikipedia.org/wiki/YAML#Syntax
4270−
4271−## Backslash escapes
4272−
4273−#### Extension: `all_symbols_escapable` ####
4274−
4275−Except inside a code block or inline code, any punctuation or space
4276−character preceded by a backslash will be treated literally, even if it
4277−would normally indicate formatting. Thus, for example, if one writes
4278−
4279− *\*hello\**
4280−
4281−one will get
2667+A caption may optionally be provided with all 4 kinds of tables (as
2668+illustrated in the examples below). A caption is a paragraph beginning
2669+with the string `Table:` (or just `:`), which will be stripped off.
2670+It may appear either before or after the table.
42822671
4283− <em>*hello*</em>
2672+#### Extension: `simple_tables` ####
42842673
4285−instead of
2674+Simple tables look like this:
42862675
4287− <strong>hello</strong>
2676+ Right Left Center Default
2677+ ------- ------ ---------- -------
2678+ 12 12 12 12
2679+ 123 123 123 123
2680+ 1 1 1 1
42882681
4289−This rule is easier to remember than standard Markdown's rule,
4290−which allows only the following characters to be backslash-escaped:
2682+ Table: Demonstration of simple table syntax.
42912683
4292− \`*_{}[]()>#+-.!
2684+The headers and table rows must each fit on one line. Column
2685+alignments are determined by the position of the header text relative
2686+to the dashed line below it:[^4]
42932687
4294−(However, if the `markdown_strict` format is used, the standard Markdown rule
4295−will be used.)
2688+ - If the dashed line is flush with the header text on the right side
2689+ but extends beyond it on the left, the column is right-aligned.
2690+ - If the dashed line is flush with the header text on the left side
2691+ but extends beyond it on the right, the column is left-aligned.
2692+ - If the dashed line extends beyond the header text on both sides,
2693+ the column is centered.
2694+ - If the dashed line is flush with the header text on both sides,
2695+ the default alignment is used (in most cases, this will be left).
42962696
4297−A backslash-escaped space is parsed as a nonbreaking space. In TeX output,
4298−it will appear as `~`. In HTML and XML output, it will appear as a
4299−literal unicode nonbreaking space character (note that it will thus
4300−actually look "invisible" in the generated HTML source; you can still
4301−use the `--ascii` command-line option to make it appear as an explicit
4302−entity).
2697+[^4]: This scheme is due to Michel Fortin, who proposed it on the
2698+ [Markdown discussion list](http://six.pairlist.net/pipermail/markdown-discuss/2005-March/001097.html).
43032699
4304−A backslash-escaped newline (i.e. a backslash occurring at the end of
4305−a line) is parsed as a hard line break. It will appear in TeX output as
4306−`\\` and in HTML as `<br />`. This is a nice alternative to
4307−Markdown's "invisible" way of indicating hard line breaks using
4308−two trailing spaces on a line.
2700+The table must end with a blank line, or a line of dashes followed by
2701+a blank line.
43092702
4310−Backslash escapes do not work in verbatim contexts.
2703+The column headers may be omitted, provided a dashed line is used
2704+to end the table. For example:
43112705
4312−## Inline formatting
2706+ ------- ------ ---------- -------
2707+ 12 12 12 12
2708+ 123 123 123 123
2709+ 1 1 1 1
2710+ ------- ------ ---------- -------
43132711
4314−### Emphasis ###
2712+When headers are omitted, column alignments are determined on the basis
2713+of the first line of the table body. So, in the tables above, the columns
2714+would be right, left, center, and right aligned, respectively.
43152715
4316−To *emphasize* some text, surround it with `*`s or `_`, like this:
2716+#### Extension: `multiline_tables` ####
43172717
4318− This text is _emphasized with underscores_, and this
4319− is *emphasized with asterisks*.
2718+Multiline tables allow headers and table rows to span multiple lines
2719+of text (but cells that span multiple columns or rows of the table are
2720+not supported). Here is an example:
43202721
4321−Double `*` or `_` produces **strong emphasis**:
2722+ -------------------------------------------------------------
2723+ Centered Default Right Left
2724+ Header Aligned Aligned Aligned
2725+ ----------- ------- --------------- -------------------------
2726+ First row 12.0 Example of a row that
2727+ spans multiple lines.
43222728
4323− This is **strong emphasis** and __with underscores__.
2729+ Second row 5.0 Here's another one. Note
2730+ the blank line between
2731+ rows.
2732+ -------------------------------------------------------------
43242733
4325−A `*` or `_` character surrounded by spaces, or backslash-escaped,
4326−will not trigger emphasis:
2734+ Table: Here's the caption. It, too, may span
2735+ multiple lines.
43272736
4328− This is * not emphasized *, and \*neither is this\*.
2737+These work like simple tables, but with the following differences:
43292738
4330−#### Extension: `intraword_underscores` ####
2739+ - They must begin with a row of dashes, before the header text
2740+ (unless the headers are omitted).
2741+ - They must end with a row of dashes, then a blank line.
2742+ - The rows must be separated by blank lines.
43312743
4332−Because `_` is sometimes used inside words and identifiers,
4333−pandoc does not interpret a `_` surrounded by alphanumeric
4334−characters as an emphasis marker. If you want to emphasize
4335−just part of a word, use `*`:
2744+In multiline tables, the table parser pays attention to the widths of
2745+the columns, and the writers try to reproduce these relative widths in
2746+the output. So, if you find that one of the columns is too narrow in the
2747+output, try widening it in the Markdown source.
43362748
4337− feas*ible*, not feas*able*.
2749+Headers may be omitted in multiline tables as well as simple tables:
43382750
2751+ ----------- ------- --------------- -------------------------
2752+ First row 12.0 Example of a row that
2753+ spans multiple lines.
43392754
4340−### Strikeout ###
2755+ Second row 5.0 Here's another one. Note
2756+ the blank line between
2757+ rows.
2758+ ----------- ------- --------------- -------------------------
43412759
4342−#### Extension: `strikeout` ####
2760+ : Here's a multiline table without headers.
43432761
4344−To strikeout a section of text with a horizontal line, begin and end it
4345−with `~~`. Thus, for example,
2762+It is possible for a multiline table to have just one row, but the row
2763+should be followed by a blank line (and then the row of dashes that ends
2764+the table), or the table may be interpreted as a simple table.
43462765
4347− This ~~is deleted text.~~
2766+#### Extension: `grid_tables` ####
43482767
2768+Grid tables look like this:
43492769
4350−### Superscripts and subscripts ###
2770+ : Sample grid table.
43512771
4352−#### Extension: `superscript`, `subscript` ####
2772+ +---------------+---------------+--------------------+
2773+ | Fruit | Price | Advantages |
2774+ +===============+===============+====================+
2775+ | Bananas | $1.34 | - built-in wrapper |
2776+ | | | - bright color |
2777+ +---------------+---------------+--------------------+
2778+ | Oranges | $2.10 | - cures scurvy |
2779+ | | | - tasty |
2780+ +---------------+---------------+--------------------+
43532781
4354−Superscripts may be written by surrounding the superscripted text by `^`
4355−characters; subscripts may be written by surrounding the subscripted
4356−text by `~` characters. Thus, for example,
2782+The row of `=`s separates the header from the table body, and can be
2783+omitted for a headerless table. The cells of grid tables may contain
2784+arbitrary block elements (multiple paragraphs, code blocks, lists,
2785+etc.). Cells that span multiple columns or rows are not
2786+supported. Grid tables can be created easily using [Emacs table mode].
43572787
4358− H~2~O is a liquid. 2^10^ is 1024.
2788+[Emacs table mode]: http://table.sourceforge.net/
43592789
4360−The text between `^...^` or `~...~` may not contain spaces or
4361−newlines. If the superscripted or subscripted text contains
4362−spaces, these spaces must be escaped with backslashes. (This is
4363−to prevent accidental superscripting and subscripting through
4364−the ordinary use of `~` and `^`, and also bad interactions with
4365−footnotes.) Thus, if you want the letter P with 'a cat' in
4366−subscripts, use `P~a\ cat~`, not `P~a cat~`.
2790+Alignments can be specified as with pipe tables, by putting
2791+colons at the boundaries of the separator line after the
2792+header:
43672793
4368−### Verbatim ###
2794+ +---------------+---------------+--------------------+
2795+ | Right | Left | Centered |
2796+ +==============:+:==============+:==================:+
2797+ | Bananas | $1.34 | built-in wrapper |
2798+ +---------------+---------------+--------------------+
43692799
4370−To make a short span of text verbatim, put it inside backticks:
2800+For headerless tables, the colons go on the top line instead:
43712801
4372− What is the difference between `>>=` and `>>`?
2802+ +--------------:+:--------------+:------------------:+
2803+ | Right | Left | Centered |
2804+ +---------------+---------------+--------------------+
43732805
4374−If the verbatim text includes a backtick, use double backticks:
2806+##### Grid Table Limitations #####
43752807
4376− Here is a literal backtick `` ` ``.
2808+Pandoc does not support grid tables with row spans or column spans.
2809+This means that neither variable numbers of columns across rows nor
2810+variable numbers of rows across columns are supported by Pandoc.
2811+All grid tables must have the same number of columns in each row,
2812+and the same number of rows in each column. For example, the
2813+Docutils [sample grid tables] will not render as expected with
2814+Pandoc.
43772815
4378−(The spaces after the opening backticks and before the closing
4379−backticks will be ignored.)
2816+[sample grid tables]: http://docutils.sourceforge.net/docs/ref/rst/restructuredtext.html#grid-tables
43802817
4381−The general rule is that a verbatim span starts with a string
4382−of consecutive backticks (optionally followed by a space)
4383−and ends with a string of the same number of backticks (optionally
4384−preceded by a space).
43852818
4386−Note that backslash-escapes (and other Markdown constructs) do not
4387−work in verbatim contexts:
2819+#### Extension: `pipe_tables` ####
43882820
4389− This is a backslash followed by an asterisk: `\*`.
2821+Pipe tables look like this:
43902822
4391−#### Extension: `inline_code_attributes` ####
2823+ | Right | Left | Default | Center |
2824+ |------:|:-----|---------|:------:|
2825+ | 12 | 12 | 12 | 12 |
2826+ | 123 | 123 | 123 | 123 |
2827+ | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
43922828
4393−Attributes can be attached to verbatim text, just as with
4394−[fenced code blocks]:
2829+ : Demonstration of pipe table syntax.
43952830
4396− `<$>`{.haskell}
2831+The syntax is identical to [PHP Markdown Extra tables]. The beginning and
2832+ending pipe characters are optional, but pipes are required between all
2833+columns. The colons indicate column alignment as shown. The header
2834+cannot be omitted. To simulate a headerless table, include a header
2835+with blank cells.
43972836
4398−### Small caps ###
2837+Since the pipes indicate column boundaries, columns need not be vertically
2838+aligned, as they are in the above example. So, this is a perfectly
2839+legal (though ugly) pipe table:
43992840
4400−To write small caps, use the `smallcaps` class:
2841+ fruit| price
2842+ -----|-----:
2843+ apple|2.05
2844+ pear|1.37
2845+ orange|3.09
44012846
4402− [Small caps]{.smallcaps}
2847+The cells of pipe tables cannot contain block elements like paragraphs
2848+and lists, and cannot span multiple lines. If a pipe table contains a
2849+row whose printable content is wider than the column width (see
2850+`--columns`), then the cell contents will wrap, with the
2851+relative cell widths determined by the widths of the separator
2852+lines. (In this case, the table will take up the full text
2853+width.) If no lines are wider than column width, then
2854+cell contents will not be wrapped, and the cells will be sized
2855+to their contents.
44032856
4404−Or, without the `bracketed_spans` extension:
2857+Note: pandoc also recognizes pipe tables of the following
2858+form, as can be produced by Emacs' orgtbl-mode:
44052859
4406− <span class="smallcaps">Small caps</span>
2860+ | One | Two |
2861+ |-----+-------|
2862+ | my | table |
2863+ | is | nice |
44072864
4408−For compatibility with other Markdown flavors, CSS is also supported:
2865+The difference is that `+` is used instead of `|`. Other orgtbl features
2866+are not supported. In particular, to get non-default column alignment,
2867+you'll need to add colons as above.
44092868
4410− <span style="font-variant:small-caps;">Small caps</span>
2869+[PHP Markdown Extra tables]: https://michelf.ca/projects/php-markdown/extra/#table
44112870
4412−This will work in all output formats that support small caps.
2871+Metadata blocks
2872+---------------
44132873
2874+#### Extension: `pandoc_title_block` ####
44142875
4415−## Math
2876+If the file begins with a title block
44162877
4417−#### Extension: `tex_math_dollars` ####
2878+ % title
2879+ % author(s) (separated by semicolons)
2880+ % date
44182881
4419−Anything between two `$` characters will be treated as TeX math. The
4420−opening `$` must have a non-space character immediately to its right,
4421−while the closing `$` must have a non-space character immediately to its
4422−left, and must not be followed immediately by a digit. Thus,
4423−`$20,000 and $30,000` won't parse as math. If for some reason
4424−you need to enclose text in literal `$` characters, backslash-escape
4425−them and they won't be treated as math delimiters.
2882+it will be parsed as bibliographic information, not regular text. (It
2883+will be used, for example, in the title of standalone LaTeX or HTML
2884+output.) The block may contain just a title, a title and an author,
2885+or all three elements. If you want to include an author but no
2886+title, or a title and a date but no author, you need a blank line:
44262887
4427−For display math, use `$$` delimiters. (In this case, the delimiters
4428−may be separated from the formula by whitespace. However, there can be
4429−no blank lines betwen the opening and closing `$$` delimiters.)
2888+ %
2889+ % Author
44302890
4431−TeX math will be printed in all output formats. How it is rendered
4432−depends on the output format:
2891+ % My title
2892+ %
2893+ % June 15, 2006
44332894
4434−LaTeX
4435− ~ It will appear verbatim surrounded by `\(...\)` (for inline
4436− math) or `\[...\]` (for display math).
2895+The title may occupy multiple lines, but continuation lines must
2896+begin with leading space, thus:
44372897
4438−Markdown, Emacs Org mode, ConTeXt, ZimWiki
4439− ~ It will appear verbatim surrounded by `$...$` (for inline
4440− math) or `$$...$$` (for display math).
2898+ % My title
2899+ on multiple lines
44412900
4442−XWiki
4443− ~ It will appear verbatim surrounded by `{{formula}}..{{/formula}}`.
2901+If a document has multiple authors, the authors may be put on
2902+separate lines with leading space, or separated by semicolons, or
2903+both. So, all of the following are equivalent:
44442904
4445−reStructuredText
4446− ~ It will be rendered using an [interpreted text role `:math:`].
2905+ % Author One
2906+ Author Two
44472907
4448−AsciiDoc
4449− ~ For AsciiDoc output format (`-t asciidoc`) it will appear verbatim
4450− surrounded by `latexmath:[$...$]` (for inline math) or
4451− `[latexmath]++++\[...\]+++` (for display math).
4452− For AsciiDoctor output format (`-t asciidoctor`) the LaTex delimiters
4453− (`$..$` and `\[..\]`) are omitted.
2908+ % Author One; Author Two
44542909
4455−Texinfo
4456− ~ It will be rendered inside a `@math` command.
2910+ % Author One;
2911+ Author Two
44572912
4458−roff man, Jira markup
4459− ~ It will be rendered verbatim without `$`'s.
2913+The date must fit on one line.
44602914
4461−MediaWiki, DokuWiki
4462− ~ It will be rendered inside `<math>` tags.
2915+All three metadata fields may contain standard inline formatting
2916+(italics, links, footnotes, etc.).
44632917
4464−Textile
4465− ~ It will be rendered inside `<span class="math">` tags.
2918+Title blocks will always be parsed, but they will affect the output only
2919+when the `--standalone` (`-s`) option is chosen. In HTML output, titles
2920+will appear twice: once in the document head -- this is the title that
2921+will appear at the top of the window in a browser -- and once at the
2922+beginning of the document body. The title in the document head can have
2923+an optional prefix attached (`--title-prefix` or `-T` option). The title
2924+in the body appears as an H1 element with class "title", so it can be
2925+suppressed or reformatted with CSS. If a title prefix is specified with
2926+`-T` and no title block appears in the document, the title prefix will
2927+be used by itself as the HTML title.
44662928
4467−RTF, OpenDocument
4468− ~ It will be rendered, if possible, using Unicode characters,
4469− and will otherwise appear verbatim.
2929+The man page writer extracts a title, man page section number, and
2930+other header and footer information from the title line. The title
2931+is assumed to be the first word on the title line, which may optionally
2932+end with a (single-digit) section number in parentheses. (There should
2933+be no space between the title and the parentheses.) Anything after
2934+this is assumed to be additional footer and header text. A single pipe
2935+character (`|`) should be used to separate the footer text from the header
2936+text. Thus,
44702937
4471−ODT
4472− ~ It will be rendered, if possible, using MathML.
2938+ % PANDOC(1)
44732939
4474−DocBook
4475− ~ If the `--mathml` flag is used, it will be rendered using MathML
4476− in an `inlineequation` or `informalequation` tag. Otherwise it
4477− will be rendered, if possible, using Unicode characters.
2940+will yield a man page with the title `PANDOC` and section 1.
2941+
2942+ % PANDOC(1) Pandoc User Manuals
44782943
4479−Docx
4480− ~ It will be rendered using OMML math markup.
2944+will also have "Pandoc User Manuals" in the footer.
44812945
4482−FictionBook2
4483− ~ If the `--webtex` option is used, formulas are rendered as images
4484− using CodeCogs or other compatible web service, downloaded
4485− and embedded in the e-book. Otherwise, they will appear verbatim.
2946+ % PANDOC(1) Pandoc User Manuals | Version 4.0
44862947
4487−HTML, Slidy, DZSlides, S5, EPUB
4488− ~ The way math is rendered in HTML will depend on the
4489− command-line options selected. Therefore see [Math rendering in HTML]
4490− above.
2948+will also have "Version 4.0" in the header.
44912949
4492−[interpreted text role `:math:`]: https://docutils.sourceforge.io/docs/ref/rst/roles.html#math
2950+#### Extension: `yaml_metadata_block` ####
44932951
4494−## Raw HTML
2952+A YAML metadata block is a valid YAML object, delimited by a line of three
2953+hyphens (`---`) at the top and a line of three hyphens (`---`) or three dots
2954+(`...`) at the bottom. A YAML metadata block may occur anywhere in the
2955+document, but if it is not at the beginning, it must be preceded by a blank
2956+line. (Note that, because of the way pandoc concatenates input files when
2957+several are provided, you may also keep the metadata in a separate YAML file
2958+and pass it to pandoc as an argument, along with your Markdown files:
44952959
4496−#### Extension: `raw_html` ####
2960+ pandoc chap1.md chap2.md chap3.md metadata.yaml -s -o book.html
44972961
4498−Markdown allows you to insert raw HTML (or DocBook) anywhere in a document
4499−(except verbatim contexts, where `<`, `>`, and `&` are interpreted
4500−literally). (Technically this is not an extension, since standard
4501−Markdown allows it, but it has been made an extension so that it can
4502−be disabled if desired.)
2962+Just be sure that the YAML file begins with `---` and ends with `---` or
2963+`...`.)
45032964
4504−The raw HTML is passed through unchanged in HTML, S5, Slidy, Slideous,
4505−DZSlides, EPUB, Markdown, CommonMark, Emacs Org mode, and Textile
4506−output, and suppressed in other formats.
2965+Metadata will be taken from the fields of the YAML object and added to any
2966+existing document metadata. Metadata can contain lists and objects (nested
2967+arbitrarily), but all string scalars will be interpreted as Markdown. Fields
2968+with names ending in an underscore will be ignored by pandoc. (They may be
2969+given a role by external processors.)
45072970
4508−For a more explicit way of including raw HTML in a Markdown
4509−document, see the [`raw_attribute` extension][Extension: `raw_attribute`].
2971+A document may contain multiple metadata blocks. The metadata fields will
2972+be combined through a *left-biased union*: if two metadata blocks attempt
2973+to set the same field, the value from the first block will be taken.
45102974
4511−In the CommonMark format, if `raw_html` is enabled, superscripts,
4512−subscripts, strikeouts and small capitals will be represented as HTML.
4513−Otherwise, plain-text fallbacks will be used. Note that even if
4514−`raw_html` is disabled, tables will be rendered with HTML syntax if
4515−they cannot use pipe syntax.
2975+When pandoc is used with `-t markdown` to create a Markdown document,
2976+a YAML metadata block will be produced only if the `-s/--standalone`
2977+option is used. All of the metadata will appear in a single block
2978+at the beginning of the document.
45162979
4517−#### Extension: `markdown_in_html_blocks` ####
2980+Note that YAML escaping rules must be followed. Thus, for example,
2981+if a title contains a colon, it must be quoted. The pipe character
2982+(`|`) can be used to begin an indented block that will be interpreted
2983+literally, without need for escaping. This form is necessary
2984+when the field contains blank lines or block-level formatting:
45182985
4519−Standard Markdown allows you to include HTML "blocks": blocks
4520−of HTML between balanced tags that are separated from the surrounding text
4521−with blank lines, and start and end at the left margin. Within
4522−these blocks, everything is interpreted as HTML, not Markdown;
4523−so (for example), `*` does not signify emphasis.
2986+ ---
2987+ title: 'This is the title: it contains a colon'
2988+ author:
2989+ - Author One
2990+ - Author Two
2991+ tags: [nothing, nothingness]
2992+ abstract: |
2993+ This is the abstract.
45242994
4525−Pandoc behaves this way when the `markdown_strict` format is used; but
4526−by default, pandoc interprets material between HTML block tags as Markdown.
4527−Thus, for example, pandoc will turn
2995+ It consists of two paragraphs.
2996+ ...
45282997
4529− <table>
4530− <tr>
4531− <td>*one*</td>
4532− <td>[a link](https://google.com)</td>
4533− </tr>
4534− </table>
2998+Template variables will be set automatically from the metadata. Thus, for
2999+example, in writing HTML, the variable `abstract` will be set to the HTML
3000+equivalent of the Markdown in the `abstract` field:
45353001
4536−into
3002+ <p>This is the abstract.</p>
3003+ <p>It consists of two paragraphs.</p>
45373004
4538− <table>
4539− <tr>
4540− <td><em>one</em></td>
4541− <td><a href="https://google.com">a link</a></td>
4542− </tr>
4543− </table>
3005+Variables can contain arbitrary YAML structures, but the template must match
3006+this structure. The `author` variable in the default templates expects a
3007+simple list or string, but can be changed to support more complicated
3008+structures. The following combination, for example, would add an affiliation
3009+to the author if one is given:
45443010
4545−whereas `Markdown.pl` will preserve it as is.
3011+ ---
3012+ title: The document title
3013+ author:
3014+ - name: Author One
3015+ affiliation: University of Somewhere
3016+ - name: Author Two
3017+ affiliation: University of Nowhere
3018+ ...
45463019
4547−There is one exception to this rule: text between `<script>`,
4548−`<style>`, and `<textarea>` tags is not interpreted as Markdown.
3020+To use the structured authors in the example above, you would need a custom
3021+template:
45493022
4550−This departure from standard Markdown should make it easier to mix
4551−Markdown with HTML block elements. For example, one can surround
4552−a block of Markdown text with `<div>` tags without preventing it
4553−from being interpreted as Markdown.
3023+ $for(author)$
3024+ $if(author.name)$
3025+ $author.name$$if(author.affiliation)$ ($author.affiliation$)$endif$
3026+ $else$
3027+ $author$
3028+ $endif$
3029+ $endfor$
45543030
4555−#### Extension: `native_divs` ####
45563031
4557−Use native pandoc `Div` blocks for content inside `<div>` tags.
4558−For the most part this should give the same output as
4559−`markdown_in_html_blocks`, but it makes it easier to write pandoc
4560−filters to manipulate groups of blocks.
3032+Backslash escapes
3033+-----------------
45613034
4562−#### Extension: `native_spans` ####
3035+#### Extension: `all_symbols_escapable` ####
45633036
4564−Use native pandoc `Span` blocks for content inside `<span>` tags.
4565−For the most part this should give the same output as `raw_html`,
4566−but it makes it easier to write pandoc filters to manipulate groups
4567−of inlines.
3037+Except inside a code block or inline code, any punctuation or space
3038+character preceded by a backslash will be treated literally, even if it
3039+would normally indicate formatting. Thus, for example, if one writes
45683040
4569−#### Extension: `raw_tex` ####
3041+ *\*hello\**
45703042
4571−In addition to raw HTML, pandoc allows raw LaTeX, TeX, and ConTeXt to be
4572−included in a document. Inline TeX commands will be preserved and passed
4573−unchanged to the LaTeX and ConTeXt writers. Thus, for example, you can use
4574−LaTeX to include BibTeX citations:
3043+one will get
45753044
4576− This result was proved in \cite{jones.1967}.
3045+ <em>*hello*</em>
45773046
4578−Note that in LaTeX environments, like
3047+instead of
45793048
4580− \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}\hline
4581− Age & Frequency \\ \hline
4582− 18--25 & 15 \\
4583− 26--35 & 33 \\
4584− 36--45 & 22 \\ \hline
4585− \end{tabular}
3049+ <strong>hello</strong>
45863050
4587−the material between the begin and end tags will be interpreted as raw
4588−LaTeX, not as Markdown.
3051+This rule is easier to remember than standard Markdown's rule,
3052+which allows only the following characters to be backslash-escaped:
45893053
4590−For a more explicit and flexible way of including raw TeX in a
4591−Markdown document, see the [`raw_attribute`
4592−extension][Extension: `raw_attribute`].
3054+ \`*_{}[]()>#+-.!
45933055
4594−Inline LaTeX is ignored in output formats other than Markdown, LaTeX,
4595−Emacs Org mode, and ConTeXt.
3056+(However, if the `markdown_strict` format is used, the standard Markdown rule
3057+will be used.)
45963058
4597−### Generic raw attribute ###
3059+A backslash-escaped space is parsed as a nonbreaking space. It will
3060+appear in TeX output as `~` and in HTML and XML as `\ ` or
3061+`\ `.
45983062
4599−#### Extension: `raw_attribute` ####
3063+A backslash-escaped newline (i.e. a backslash occurring at the end of
3064+a line) is parsed as a hard line break. It will appear in TeX output as
3065+`\\` and in HTML as `<br />`. This is a nice alternative to
3066+Markdown's "invisible" way of indicating hard line breaks using
3067+two trailing spaces on a line.
46003068
4601−Inline spans and fenced code blocks with a special
4602−kind of attribute will be parsed as raw content with the
4603−designated format. For example, the following produces a raw
4604−roff `ms` block:
3069+Backslash escapes do not work in verbatim contexts.
46053070
4606− ```{=ms}
4607− .MYMACRO
4608− blah blah
4609− ```
4610−And the following produces a raw `html` inline element:
3071+Inline formatting
3072+-----------------
46113073
4612− This is `<a>html</a>`{=html}
3074+### Emphasis ###
46133075
4614−This can be useful to insert raw xml into `docx` documents, e.g.
4615−a pagebreak:
3076+To *emphasize* some text, surround it with `*`s or `_`, like this:
46163077
4617− ```{=openxml}
4618− <w:p>
4619− <w:r>
4620− <w:br w:type="page"/>
4621− </w:r>
4622− </w:p>
4623− ```
3078+ This text is _emphasized with underscores_, and this
3079+ is *emphasized with asterisks*.
46243080
4625−The format name should match the target format name (see
4626−`-t/--to`, above, for a list, or use `pandoc
4627−--list-output-formats`). Use `openxml` for `docx` output,
4628−`opendocument` for `odt` output, `html5` for `epub3` output,
4629−`html4` for `epub2` output, and `latex`, `beamer`,
4630−`ms`, or `html5` for `pdf` output (depending on what you
4631−use for `--pdf-engine`).
3081+Double `*` or `_` produces **strong emphasis**:
46323082
4633−This extension presupposes that the relevant kind of
4634−inline code or fenced code block is enabled. Thus, for
4635−example, to use a raw attribute with a backtick code block,
4636−`backtick_code_blocks` must be enabled.
3083+ This is **strong emphasis** and __with underscores__.
46373084
4638−The raw attribute cannot be combined with regular attributes.
3085+A `*` or `_` character surrounded by spaces, or backslash-escaped,
3086+will not trigger emphasis:
46393087
4640−## LaTeX macros
3088+ This is * not emphasized *, and \*neither is this\*.
46413089
4642−#### Extension: `latex_macros` ####
3090+#### Extension: `intraword_underscores` ####
46433091
4644−When this extension is enabled, pandoc will parse LaTeX
4645−macro definitions and apply the resulting macros to all LaTeX
4646−math and raw LaTeX. So, for example, the following will work in
4647−all output formats, not just LaTeX:
3092+Because `_` is sometimes used inside words and identifiers,
3093+pandoc does not interpret a `_` surrounded by alphanumeric
3094+characters as an emphasis marker. If you want to emphasize
3095+just part of a word, use `*`:
46483096
4649− \newcommand{\tuple}[1]{\langle #1 \rangle}
3097+ feas*ible*, not feas*able*.
46503098
4651− $\tuple{a, b, c}$
46523099
4653−Note that LaTeX macros will not be applied if they occur
4654−inside a raw span or block marked with the
4655−[`raw_attribute` extension](#extension-raw_attribute).
3100+### Strikeout ###
46563101
4657−When `latex_macros` is disabled, the raw LaTeX and math will
4658−not have macros applied. This is usually a better approach when
4659−you are targeting LaTeX or PDF.
3102+#### Extension: `strikeout` ####
3103+
3104+To strikeout a section of text with a horizontal line, begin and end it
3105+with `~~`. Thus, for example,
46603106
4661−Macro definitions in LaTeX will be passed through as raw LaTeX
4662−only if `latex_macros` is not enabled. Macro definitions in
4663−Markdown source (or other formats allowing `raw_tex`) will
4664−be passed through regardless of whether `latex_macros` is
4665−enabled.
3107+ This ~~is deleted text.~~
46663108
4667−## Links
46683109
4669−Markdown allows links to be specified in several ways.
3110+### Superscripts and subscripts ###
46703111
4671−### Automatic links ###
3112+#### Extension: `superscript`, `subscript` ####
46723113
4673−If you enclose a URL or email address in pointy brackets, it
4674−will become a link:
3114+Superscripts may be written by surrounding the superscripted text by `^`
3115+characters; subscripts may be written by surrounding the subscripted
3116+text by `~` characters. Thus, for example,
46753117
4676− <https://google.com>
4677− <sam@green.eggs.ham>
3118+ H~2~O is a liquid. 2^10^ is 1024.
46783119
4679−### Inline links ###
3120+If the superscripted or subscripted text contains spaces, these spaces
3121+must be escaped with backslashes. (This is to prevent accidental
3122+superscripting and subscripting through the ordinary use of `~` and `^`.)
3123+Thus, if you want the letter P with 'a cat' in subscripts, use
3124+`P~a\ cat~`, not `P~a cat~`.
46803125
4681−An inline link consists of the link text in square brackets,
4682−followed by the URL in parentheses. (Optionally, the URL can
4683−be followed by a link title, in quotes.)
46843126
4685− This is an [inline link](/url), and here's [one with
4686− a title](https://fsf.org "click here for a good time!").
3127+### Verbatim ###
46873128
4688−There can be no space between the bracketed part and the parenthesized part.
4689−The link text can contain formatting (such as emphasis), but the title cannot.
3129+To make a short span of text verbatim, put it inside backticks:
46903130
4691−Email addresses in inline links are not autodetected, so they have to be
4692−prefixed with `mailto`:
3131+ What is the difference between `>>=` and `>>`?
46933132
4694− [Write me!](mailto:sam@green.eggs.ham)
3133+If the verbatim text includes a backtick, use double backticks:
46953134
4696−### Reference links ###
3135+ Here is a literal backtick `` ` ``.
46973136
4698−An *explicit* reference link has two parts, the link itself and the link
4699−definition, which may occur elsewhere in the document (either
4700−before or after the link).
3137+(The spaces after the opening backticks and before the closing
3138+backticks will be ignored.)
47013139
4702−The link consists of link text in square brackets, followed by a label in
4703−square brackets. (There cannot be space between the two unless the
4704−`spaced_reference_links` extension is enabled.) The link definition
4705−consists of the bracketed label, followed by a colon and a space, followed by
4706−the URL, and optionally (after a space) a link title either in quotes or in
4707−parentheses. The label must not be parseable as a citation (assuming
4708−the `citations` extension is enabled): citations take precedence over
4709−link labels.
3140+The general rule is that a verbatim span starts with a string
3141+of consecutive backticks (optionally followed by a space)
3142+and ends with a string of the same number of backticks (optionally
3143+preceded by a space).
47103144
4711−Here are some examples:
3145+Note that backslash-escapes (and other Markdown constructs) do not
3146+work in verbatim contexts:
47123147
4713− [my label 1]: /foo/bar.html "My title, optional"
4714− [my label 2]: /foo
4715− [my label 3]: https://fsf.org (The free software foundation)
4716− [my label 4]: /bar#special 'A title in single quotes'
3148+ This is a backslash followed by an asterisk: `\*`.
47173149
4718−The URL may optionally be surrounded by angle brackets:
3150+#### Extension: `inline_code_attributes` ####
47193151
4720− [my label 5]: <http://foo.bar.baz>
3152+Attributes can be attached to verbatim text, just as with
3153+[fenced code blocks]:
47213154
4722−The title may go on the next line:
3155+ `<$>`{.haskell}
47233156
4724− [my label 3]: https://fsf.org
4725− "The free software foundation"
3157+### Small caps ###
47263158
4727−Note that link labels are not case sensitive. So, this will work:
3159+To write small caps, use the `smallcaps` class:
3160+
3161+ [Small caps]{.smallcaps}
47283162
4729− Here is [my link][FOO]
3163+Or, without the `bracketed_spans` extension:
47303164
4731− [Foo]: /bar/baz
3165+ <span class="smallcaps">Small caps</span>
47323166
4733−In an *implicit* reference link, the second pair of brackets is
4734−empty:
3167+For compatibility with other Markdown flavors, CSS is also supported:
47353168
4736− See [my website][].
3169+ <span style="font-variant:small-caps;">Small caps</span>
47373170
4738− [my website]: http://foo.bar.baz
3171+This will work in all output formats that support small caps.
47393172
4740−Note: In `Markdown.pl` and most other Markdown implementations,
4741−reference link definitions cannot occur in nested constructions
4742−such as list items or block quotes. Pandoc lifts this arbitrary
4743−seeming restriction. So the following is fine in pandoc, though
4744−not in most other implementations:
47453173
4746− > My block [quote].
4747− >
4748− > [quote]: /foo
3174+Math
3175+----
47493176
4750−#### Extension: `shortcut_reference_links` ####
3177+#### Extension: `tex_math_dollars` ####
47513178
4752−In a *shortcut* reference link, the second pair of brackets may
4753−be omitted entirely:
3179+Anything between two `$` characters will be treated as TeX math. The
3180+opening `$` must have a non-space character immediately to its right,
3181+while the closing `$` must have a non-space character immediately to its
3182+left, and must not be followed immediately by a digit. Thus,
3183+`$20,000 and $30,000` won't parse as math. If for some reason
3184+you need to enclose text in literal `$` characters, backslash-escape
3185+them and they won't be treated as math delimiters.
47543186
4755− See [my website].
3187+TeX math will be printed in all output formats. How it is rendered
3188+depends on the output format:
47563189
4757− [my website]: http://foo.bar.baz
3190+Markdown, LaTeX, Emacs Org mode, ConTeXt, ZimWiki
3191+ ~ It will appear verbatim between `$` characters.
47583192
4759−### Internal links ###
3193+reStructuredText
3194+ ~ It will be rendered using an [interpreted text role `:math:`].
47603195
4761−To link to another section of the same document, use the automatically
4762−generated identifier (see [Heading identifiers]). For example:
3196+AsciiDoc
3197+ ~ It will be rendered as `latexmath:[...]`.
47633198
4764− See the [Introduction](#introduction).
3199+Texinfo
3200+ ~ It will be rendered inside a `@math` command.
47653201
4766−or
3202+groff man
3203+ ~ It will be rendered verbatim without `$`'s.
47673204
4768− See the [Introduction].
3205+MediaWiki, DokuWiki
3206+ ~ It will be rendered inside `<math>` tags.
47693207
4770− [Introduction]: #introduction
3208+Textile
3209+ ~ It will be rendered inside `<span class="math">` tags.
47713210
4772−Internal links are currently supported for HTML formats (including
4773−HTML slide shows and EPUB), LaTeX, and ConTeXt.
3211+RTF, OpenDocument
3212+ ~ It will be rendered, if possible, using Unicode characters,
3213+ and will otherwise appear verbatim.
47743214
4775−## Images
3215+ODT
3216+ ~ It will be rendered, if possible, using MathML.
47763217
4777−A link immediately preceded by a `!` will be treated as an image.
4778−The link text will be used as the image's alt text:
3218+DocBook
3219+ ~ If the `--mathml` flag is used, it will be rendered using MathML
3220+ in an `inlineequation` or `informalequation` tag. Otherwise it
3221+ will be rendered, if possible, using Unicode characters.
47793222
4780− 
3223+Docx
3224+ ~ It will be rendered using OMML math markup.
47813225
4782− ![movie reel]
3226+FictionBook2
3227+ ~ If the `--webtex` option is used, formulas are rendered as images
3228+ using CodeCogs or other compatible web service, downloaded
3229+ and embedded in the e-book. Otherwise, they will appear verbatim.
47833230
4784− [movie reel]: movie.gif
3231+HTML, Slidy, DZSlides, S5, EPUB
3232+ ~ The way math is rendered in HTML will depend on the
3233+ command-line options selected. Therefore see [Math rendering in HTML]
3234+ above.
47853235
4786−#### Extension: `implicit_figures` ####
3236+[interpreted text role `:math:`]: http://docutils.sourceforge.net/docs/ref/rst/roles.html#math
47873237
4788−An image with nonempty alt text, occurring by itself in a
4789−paragraph, will be rendered as a figure with a caption. The
4790−image's alt text will be used as the caption.
3238+Raw HTML
3239+--------
47913240
4792− 
3241+#### Extension: `raw_html` ####
47933242
4794−How this is rendered depends on the output format. Some output
4795−formats (e.g. RTF) do not yet support figures. In those
4796−formats, you'll just get an image in a paragraph by itself, with
4797−no caption.
3243+Markdown allows you to insert raw HTML (or DocBook) anywhere in a document
3244+(except verbatim contexts, where `<`, `>`, and `&` are interpreted
3245+literally). (Technically this is not an extension, since standard
3246+Markdown allows it, but it has been made an extension so that it can
3247+be disabled if desired.)
47983248
4799−If you just want a regular inline image, just make sure it is not
4800−the only thing in the paragraph. One way to do this is to insert a
4801−nonbreaking space after the image:
3249+The raw HTML is passed through unchanged in HTML, S5, Slidy, Slideous,
3250+DZSlides, EPUB, Markdown, Emacs Org mode, and Textile output, and suppressed
3251+in other formats.
48023252
4803− \
3253+#### Extension: `markdown_in_html_blocks` ####
48043254
4805−Note that in reveal.js slide shows, an image in a paragraph
4806−by itself that has the `stretch` class will fill the screen,
4807−and the caption and figure tags will be omitted.
3255+Standard Markdown allows you to include HTML "blocks": blocks
3256+of HTML between balanced tags that are separated from the surrounding text
3257+with blank lines, and start and end at the left margin. Within
3258+these blocks, everything is interpreted as HTML, not Markdown;
3259+so (for example), `*` does not signify emphasis.
48083260
4809−#### Extension: `link_attributes` ####
3261+Pandoc behaves this way when the `markdown_strict` format is used; but
3262+by default, pandoc interprets material between HTML block tags as Markdown.
3263+Thus, for example, pandoc will turn
48103264
4811−Attributes can be set on links and images:
3265+ <table>
3266+ <tr>
3267+ <td>*one*</td>
3268+ <td>[a link](http://google.com)</td>
3269+ </tr>
3270+ </table>
48123271
4813− An inline {#id .class width=30 height=20px}
4814− and a reference ![image][ref] with attributes.
3272+into
48153273
4816− [ref]: foo.jpg "optional title" {#id .class key=val key2="val 2"}
3274+ <table>
3275+ <tr>
3276+ <td><em>one</em></td>
3277+ <td><a href="http://google.com">a link</a></td>
3278+ </tr>
3279+ </table>
48173280
4818−(This syntax is compatible with [PHP Markdown Extra] when only `#id`
4819−and `.class` are used.)
3281+whereas `Markdown.pl` will preserve it as is.
48203282
4821−For HTML and EPUB, all known HTML5 attributes except `width` and
4822−`height` (but including `srcset` and `sizes`) are passed through
4823−as is. Unknown attributes are passed through as custom
4824−attributes, with `data-` prepended. The other writers ignore
4825−attributes that are not specifically supported by their output format.
3283+There is one exception to this rule: text between `<script>` and
3284+`<style>` tags is not interpreted as Markdown.
48263285
4827−The `width` and `height` attributes on images are treated specially. When
4828−used without a unit, the unit is assumed to be pixels. However, any of
4829−the following unit identifiers can be used: `px`, `cm`, `mm`, `in`, `inch`
4830−and `%`. There must not be any spaces between the number and the unit.
4831−For example:
3286+This departure from standard Markdown should make it easier to mix
3287+Markdown with HTML block elements. For example, one can surround
3288+a block of Markdown text with `<div>` tags without preventing it
3289+from being interpreted as Markdown.
48323290
4833−```
4834−{ width=50% }
4835−```
3291+#### Extension: `native_divs` ####
48363292
4837−- Dimensions may be converted to a form that is compatible with
4838− the output format (for example, dimensions given in pixels will
4839− be converted to inches when converting HTML to LaTeX). Conversion
4840− between pixels and physical measurements is affected by the
4841− `--dpi` option (by default, 96 dpi is assumed, unless the image
4842− itself contains dpi information).
4843−- The `%` unit is generally relative to some available space.
4844− For example the above example will render to the following.
4845− - HTML: `<img href="file.jpg" style="width: 50%;" />`
4846− - LaTeX: `\includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth,height=\textheight]{file.jpg}`
4847− (If you're using a custom template, you need to configure `graphicx`
4848− as in the default template.)
4849− - ConTeXt: `\externalfigure[file.jpg][width=0.5\textwidth]`
4850−- Some output formats have a notion of a class
4851− ([ConTeXt](https://wiki.contextgarden.net/Using_Graphics#Multiple_Image_Settings))
4852− or a unique identifier (LaTeX `\caption`), or both (HTML).
4853−- When no `width` or `height` attributes are specified, the fallback
4854− is to look at the image resolution and the dpi metadata embedded in
4855− the image file.
3293+Use native pandoc `Div` blocks for content inside `<div>` tags.
3294+For the most part this should give the same output as
3295+`markdown_in_html_blocks`, but it makes it easier to write pandoc
3296+filters to manipulate groups of blocks.
48563297
4857−## Divs and Spans
3298+#### Extension: `native_spans` ####
48583299
4859−Using the `native_divs` and `native_spans` extensions
4860−(see [above][Extension: `native_divs`]), HTML syntax can
4861−be used as part of markdown to create native `Div` and `Span`
4862−elements in the pandoc AST (as opposed to raw HTML).
4863−However, there is also nicer syntax available:
3300+Use native pandoc `Span` blocks for content inside `<span>` tags.
3301+For the most part this should give the same output as `raw_html`,
3302+but it makes it easier to write pandoc filters to manipulate groups
3303+of inlines.
48643304
48653305#### Extension: `fenced_divs` ####
48663306
@@ -4901,456 +3341,364 @@ fence need not match the number in the opening fence. However,
49013341it can be helpful for visual clarity to use fences of different
49023342lengths to distinguish nested divs from their parents.
49033343
3344+#### Extension: `raw_tex` ####
49043345
4905−#### Extension: `bracketed_spans` ####
4906−
4907−A bracketed sequence of inlines, as one would use to begin
4908−a link, will be treated as a `Span` with attributes if it is
4909−followed immediately by attributes:
4910−
4911− [This is *some text*]{.class key="val"}
4912−
4913−## Footnotes
4914−
4915−#### Extension: `footnotes` ####
4916−
4917−Pandoc's Markdown allows footnotes, using the following syntax:
4918−
4919− Here is a footnote reference,[^1] and another.[^longnote]
3346+In addition to raw HTML, pandoc allows raw LaTeX, TeX, and ConTeXt to be
3347+included in a document. Inline TeX commands will be preserved and passed
3348+unchanged to the LaTeX and ConTeXt writers. Thus, for example, you can use
3349+LaTeX to include BibTeX citations:
49203350
4921− [^1]: Here is the footnote.
3351+ This result was proved in \cite{jones.1967}.
49223352
4923− [^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
3353+Note that in LaTeX environments, like
49243354
4925− Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
4926− belong to the previous footnote.
3355+ \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}\hline
3356+ Age & Frequency \\ \hline
3357+ 18--25 & 15 \\
3358+ 26--35 & 33 \\
3359+ 36--45 & 22 \\ \hline
3360+ \end{tabular}
49273361
4928− { some.code }
3362+the material between the begin and end tags will be interpreted as raw
3363+LaTeX, not as Markdown.
49293364
4930− The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
4931− line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
4932− multi-paragraph list items.
3365+Inline LaTeX is ignored in output formats other than Markdown, LaTeX,
3366+Emacs Org mode, and ConTeXt.
49333367
4934− This paragraph won't be part of the note, because it
4935− isn't indented.
3368+### Generic raw attribute ###
49363369
4937−The identifiers in footnote references may not contain spaces, tabs,
4938−or newlines. These identifiers are used only to correlate the
4939−footnote reference with the note itself; in the output, footnotes
4940−will be numbered sequentially.
3370+#### Extension: `raw_attribute` ####
49413371
4942−The footnotes themselves need not be placed at the end of the
4943−document. They may appear anywhere except inside other block elements
4944−(lists, block quotes, tables, etc.). Each footnote should be
4945−separated from surrounding content (including other footnotes)
4946−by blank lines.
3372+Inline spans and fenced code blocks with a special
3373+kind of attribute will be parsed as raw content with the
3374+designated format. For example, the following produces a raw
3375+groff `ms` block:
49473376
4948−#### Extension: `inline_notes` ####
3377+ ```{=ms}
3378+ .MYMACRO
3379+ blah blah
3380+ ```
3381+And the following produces a raw `html` inline element:
49493382
4950−Inline footnotes are also allowed (though, unlike regular notes,
4951−they cannot contain multiple paragraphs). The syntax is as follows:
3383+ This is `<a>html</a>`{=html}
49523384
4953− Here is an inline note.^[Inlines notes are easier to write, since
4954− you don't have to pick an identifier and move down to type the
4955− note.]
3385+The format name should match the target format name (see
3386+`-t/--to`, above, for a list, or use `pandoc
3387+--list-output-formats`).
49563388
4957−Inline and regular footnotes may be mixed freely.
3389+This extension presupposes that the relevant kind of
3390+inline code or fenced code block is enabled. Thus, for
3391+example, to use a raw attribute with a backtick code block,
3392+`backtick_code_blocks` must be enabled.
49583393
4959−## Citation syntax
3394+The raw attribute cannot be combined with regular attributes.
49603395
4961−#### Extension: `citations` ####
3396+LaTeX macros
3397+------------
49623398
4963−To cite a bibliographic item with an identifier foo, use the
4964−syntax `@foo`. Normal citations should be included in square
4965−brackets, with semicolons separating distinct items:
3399+#### Extension: `latex_macros` ####
49663400
4967− Blah blah [@doe99; @smith2000; @smith2004].
3401+For output formats other than LaTeX, pandoc will parse LaTeX
3402+macro definitions and apply the resulting macros to all LaTeX
3403+math and raw LaTeX. So, for example, the following will work in
3404+all output formats, not just LaTeX:
49683405
4969−How this is rendered depends on the citation style. In an
4970−author-date style, it might render as
3406+ \newcommand{\tuple}[1]{\langle #1 \rangle}
49713407
4972− Blah blah (Doe 1999, Smith 2000, 2004).
3408+ $\tuple{a, b, c}$
49733409
4974−In a footnote style, it might render as
3410+In LaTeX output, the macro definitions will not be passed
3411+through as raw LaTeX.
49753412
4976− Blah blah.[^1]
3413+When `latex_macros` is disabled, the macro definitions will
3414+be passed through as raw LaTeX, and the raw LaTeX and math will
3415+not have macros applied. This is usually a better approach when
3416+you are targeting LaTeX or PDF.
49773417
4978− [^1]: John Doe, "Frogs," *Journal of Amphibians* 44 (1999);
4979− Susan Smith, "Flies," *Journal of Insects* (2000);
4980− Susan Smith, "Bees," *Journal of Insects* (2004).
3418+Links
3419+-----
49813420
4982−See the [CSL user documentation] for more information about CSL
4983−styles and how they affect rendering.
3421+Markdown allows links to be specified in several ways.
49843422
4985−Unless a citation key start with a letter, digit, or `_`,
4986−and contains only alphanumerics and internal punctuation
4987−characters (`:.#$%&-+?<>~/`), it must be surrounded
4988−by curly braces, which are not considered part of the key.
4989−In `@Foo_bar.baz.`, the key is `Foo_bar.baz`. The final
4990−period is not *internal* punctuation, so it is not included in
4991−the key. In `@{Foo_bar.baz.}`, the key is `Foo_bar.baz.`, including
4992−the final period. The curly braces are recommended if you use URLs as
4993−keys: `[@{https://example.com/bib?name=foobar&date=2000}, p. 33]`.
3423+### Automatic links ###
49943424
4995−Citation items may optionally include a prefix, a locator, and
4996−a suffix. In
3425+If you enclose a URL or email address in pointy brackets, it
3426+will become a link:
49973427
4998− Blah blah [see @doe99, pp. 33-35 and *passim*; @smith04, chap. 1].
3428+ <http://google.com>
3429+ <sam@green.eggs.ham>
49993430
5000−The first item (`doe99`) has prefix `see `, locator `pp. 33-35`,
5001−and suffix `and *passim*`. The second item (`smith04`) has
5002−locator `chap. 1` and no prefix or suffix.
3431+### Inline links ###
50033432
5004−Pandoc uses some heuristics to separate the locator from the
5005−rest of the subject. It is sensitive to the locator terms
5006−defined in the [CSL locale files]. Either abbreviated or
5007−unabbreviated forms are accepted. In the `en-US` locale, locator
5008−terms can be written in either singular or plural forms, as
5009−`book`, `bk.`/`bks.`; `chapter`, `chap.`/`chaps.`; `column`,
5010−`col.`/`cols.`; `figure`, `fig.`/`figs.`; `folio`,
5011−`fol.`/`fols.`; `number`, `no.`/`nos.`; `line`, `l.`/`ll.`;
5012−`note`, `n.`/`nn.`; `opus`, `op.`/`opp.`; `page`, `p.`/`pp.`;
5013−`paragraph`, `para.`/`paras.`; `part`, `pt.`/`pts.`; `section`,
5014−`sec.`/`secs.`; `sub verbo`, `s.v.`/`s.vv.`; `verse`,
5015−`v.`/`vv.`; `volume`, `vol.`/`vols.`; `¶`/`¶¶`; `§`/`§§`. If no
5016−locator term is used, "page" is assumed.
3433+An inline link consists of the link text in square brackets,
3434+followed by the URL in parentheses. (Optionally, the URL can
3435+be followed by a link title, in quotes.)
50173436
5018−In complex cases, you can force something to be treated as
5019−a locator by enclosing it in curly braces or prevent parsing
5020−the suffix as locator by prepending curly braces:
3437+ This is an [inline link](/url), and here's [one with
3438+ a title](http://fsf.org "click here for a good time!").
50213439
5022− [@smith{ii, A, D-Z}, with a suffix]
5023− [@smith, {pp. iv, vi-xi, (xv)-(xvii)} with suffix here]
5024− [@smith{}, 99 years later]
3440+There can be no space between the bracketed part and the parenthesized part.
3441+The link text can contain formatting (such as emphasis), but the title cannot.
50253442
5026−A minus sign (`-`) before the `@` will suppress mention of
5027−the author in the citation. This can be useful when the
5028−author is already mentioned in the text:
3443+Email addresses in inline links are not autodetected, so they have to be
3444+prefixed with `mailto`:
50293445
5030− Smith says blah [-@smith04].
3446+ [Write me!](mailto:sam@green.eggs.ham)
50313447
5032−You can also write an author-in-text citation, by omitting the
5033−square brackets:
3448+### Reference links ###
50343449
5035− @smith04 says blah.
3450+An *explicit* reference link has two parts, the link itself and the link
3451+definition, which may occur elsewhere in the document (either
3452+before or after the link).
50363453
5037− @smith04 [p. 33] says blah.
3454+The link consists of link text in square brackets, followed by a label in
3455+square brackets. (There cannot be space between the two unless the
3456+`spaced_reference_links` extension is enabled.) The link definition
3457+consists of the bracketed label, followed by a colon and a space, followed by
3458+the URL, and optionally (after a space) a link title either in quotes or in
3459+parentheses. The label must not be parseable as a citation (assuming
3460+the `citations` extension is enabled): citations take precedence over
3461+link labels.
50383462
5039−This will cause the author's name to be rendered, followed by
5040−the bibliographical details. Use this form when you want to
5041−make the citation the subject of a sentence.
5042−
5043−When you are using a note style, it is usually better to let
5044−citeproc create the footnotes from citations rather than writing
5045−an explicit note. If you do write an explicit note that
5046−contains a citation, note that normal citations will be put in
5047−parentheses, while author-in-text citations will not. For
5048−this reason, it is sometimes preferable to use the
5049−author-in-text style inside notes when using a note style.
5050−
5051−[CSL user documentation]: https://citationstyles.org/authors/
5052−[CSL]: https://docs.citationstyles.org/en/stable/specification.html
5053−[CSL markup specs]: https://docs.citationstyles.org/en/1.0/release-notes.html#rich-text-markup-within-fields
5054−[Chicago Manual of Style]: https://chicagomanualofstyle.org
5055−[Citation Style Language]: https://citationstyles.org
5056−[Zotero Style Repository]: https://www.zotero.org/styles
5057−[finding and editing styles]: https://citationstyles.org/authors/
5058−[CSL locale files]: https://github.com/citation-style-language/locales
3463+Here are some examples:
50593464
5060−## Non-default extensions
3465+ [my label 1]: /foo/bar.html "My title, optional"
3466+ [my label 2]: /foo
3467+ [my label 3]: http://fsf.org (The free software foundation)
3468+ [my label 4]: /bar#special 'A title in single quotes'
50613469
5062−The following Markdown syntax extensions are not enabled by default
5063−in pandoc, but may be enabled by adding `+EXTENSION` to the format
5064−name, where `EXTENSION` is the name of the extension. Thus, for
5065−example, `markdown+hard_line_breaks` is Markdown with hard line breaks.
3470+The URL may optionally be surrounded by angle brackets:
50663471
5067−#### Extension: `rebase_relative_paths` ####
5068−
5069−Rewrite relative paths for Markdown links and images, depending
5070−on the path of the file containing the link or image link. For
5071−each link or image, pandoc will compute the directory of the
5072−containing file, relative to the working directory, and prepend
5073−the resulting path to the link or image path.
5074−
5075−The use of this extension is best understood by example.
5076−Suppose you have a a subdirectory for each chapter of a book,
5077−`chap1`, `chap2`, `chap3`. Each contains a file `text.md` and a
5078−number of images used in the chapter. You would like to have
5079−`` in `chap1/text.md` refer to
5080−`chap1/spider.jpg` and `` in `chap2/text.md`
5081−refer to `chap2/spider.jpg`. To do this, use
5082−
5083− pandoc chap*/*.md -f markdown+rebase_relative_paths
5084−
5085−Without this extension, you would have to use
5086−`` in `chap1/text.md` and
5087−`` in `chap2/text.md`. Links with
5088−relative paths will be rewritten in the same way as images.
5089−
5090−Absolute paths and URLs are not changed. Neither are empty
5091−paths or paths consisting entirely of a fragment, e.g., `#foo`.
5092−
5093−Note that relative paths in reference links and images will
5094−be rewritten relative to the file containing the link
5095−reference definition, not the file containing the reference link
5096−or image itself, if these differ.
5097−
5098−#### Extension: `attributes` ####
5099−
5100−Allows attributes to be attached to any inline or block-level
5101−element. The syntax for the attributes is the same as that
5102−used in [`header_attributes`][Extension: `header_attributes`].
5103−
5104−- Attributes that occur immediately after an inline
5105− element affect that element. If they follow a space, then they
5106− belong to the space. (Hence, this option subsumes
5107− `inline_code_attributes` and `link_attributes`.)
5108−- Attributes that occur immediately before a block
5109− element, on a line by themselves, affect that
5110− element.
5111−- Consecutive attribute specifiers may be used,
5112− either for blocks or for inlines. Their attributes
5113− will be combined.
5114−- Attributes that occur at the end of the text of
5115− a Setext or ATX heading (separated by whitespace
5116− from the text) affect the heading element. (Hence, this
5117− option subsumes `header_attributes`.)
5118−- Attributes that occur after the opening fence
5119− in a fenced code block affect the code block element. (Hence,
5120− this option subsumes `fenced_code_attributes`.)
5121−- Attributes that occur at the end of a reference
5122− link definition affect links that refer to that
5123− definition.
5124−
5125−Note that pandoc's AST does not currently allow attributes
5126−to be attached to arbitrary elements. Hence a Span or Div
5127−container will be added if needed.
3472+ [my label 5]: <http://foo.bar.baz>
51283473
5129−#### Extension: `old_dashes` ####
3474+The title may go on the next line:
51303475
5131−Selects the pandoc <= 1.8.2.1 behavior for parsing smart dashes:
5132−`-` before a numeral is an en-dash, and `--` is an em-dash.
5133−This option only has an effect if `smart` is enabled. It is
5134−selected automatically for `textile` input.
3476+ [my label 3]: http://fsf.org
3477+ "The free software foundation"
51353478
5136−#### Extension: `angle_brackets_escapable` ####
3479+Note that link labels are not case sensitive. So, this will work:
51373480
5138−Allow `<` and `>` to be backslash-escaped, as they can be in
5139−GitHub flavored Markdown but not original Markdown. This is
5140−implied by pandoc's default `all_symbols_escapable`.
3481+ Here is [my link][FOO]
51413482
5142−#### Extension: `lists_without_preceding_blankline` ####
3483+ [Foo]: /bar/baz
51433484
5144−Allow a list to occur right after a paragraph, with no intervening
5145−blank space.
3485+In an *implicit* reference link, the second pair of brackets is
3486+empty:
51463487
5147−#### Extension: `four_space_rule` ####
3488+ See [my website][].
51483489
5149−Selects the pandoc <= 2.0 behavior for parsing lists, so that
5150−four spaces indent are needed for list item continuation
5151−paragraphs.
3490+ [my website]: http://foo.bar.baz
51523491
5153−#### Extension: `spaced_reference_links` ####
3492+Note: In `Markdown.pl` and most other Markdown implementations,
3493+reference link definitions cannot occur in nested constructions
3494+such as list items or block quotes. Pandoc lifts this arbitrary
3495+seeming restriction. So the following is fine in pandoc, though
3496+not in most other implementations:
51543497
5155−Allow whitespace between the two components of a reference link,
5156−for example,
3498+ > My block [quote].
3499+ >
3500+ > [quote]: /foo
51573501
5158− [foo] [bar].
3502+#### Extension: `shortcut_reference_links` ####
51593503
5160−#### Extension: `hard_line_breaks` ####
3504+In a *shortcut* reference link, the second pair of brackets may
3505+be omitted entirely:
51613506
5162−Causes all newlines within a paragraph to be interpreted as hard line
5163−breaks instead of spaces.
3507+ See [my website].
51643508
5165−#### Extension: `ignore_line_breaks` ####
3509+ [my website]: http://foo.bar.baz
51663510
5167−Causes newlines within a paragraph to be ignored, rather than being
5168−treated as spaces or as hard line breaks. This option is intended for
5169−use with East Asian languages where spaces are not used between words,
5170−but text is divided into lines for readability.
3511+### Internal links ###
51713512
5172−#### Extension: `east_asian_line_breaks` ####
3513+To link to another section of the same document, use the automatically
3514+generated identifier (see [Header identifiers]). For example:
51733515
5174−Causes newlines within a paragraph to be ignored, rather than
5175−being treated as spaces or as hard line breaks, when they occur
5176−between two East Asian wide characters. This is a better choice
5177−than `ignore_line_breaks` for texts that include a mix of East
5178−Asian wide characters and other characters.
3516+ See the [Introduction](#introduction).
51793517
5180−#### Extension: `emoji` ####
3518+or
51813519
5182−Parses textual emojis like `:smile:` as Unicode emoticons.
3520+ See the [Introduction].
51833521
5184−#### Extension: `tex_math_single_backslash` ####
3522+ [Introduction]: #introduction
51853523
5186−Causes anything between `\(` and `\)` to be interpreted as inline
5187−TeX math, and anything between `\[` and `\]` to be interpreted
5188−as display TeX math. Note: a drawback of this extension is that
5189−it precludes escaping `(` and `[`.
3524+Internal links are currently supported for HTML formats (including
3525+HTML slide shows and EPUB), LaTeX, and ConTeXt.
51903526
5191−#### Extension: `tex_math_double_backslash` ####
3527+Images
3528+------
51923529
5193−Causes anything between `\\(` and `\\)` to be interpreted as inline
5194−TeX math, and anything between `\\[` and `\\]` to be interpreted
5195−as display TeX math.
3530+A link immediately preceded by a `!` will be treated as an image.
3531+The link text will be used as the image's alt text:
51963532
5197−#### Extension: `markdown_attribute` ####
3533+ 
51983534
5199−By default, pandoc interprets material inside block-level tags as Markdown.
5200−This extension changes the behavior so that Markdown is only parsed
5201−inside block-level tags if the tags have the attribute `markdown=1`.
3535+ ![movie reel]
52023536
5203−#### Extension: `mmd_title_block` ####
3537+ [movie reel]: movie.gif
52043538
5205−Enables a [MultiMarkdown] style title block at the top of
5206−the document, for example:
3539+#### Extension: `implicit_figures` ####
52073540
5208− Title: My title
5209− Author: John Doe
5210− Date: September 1, 2008
5211− Comment: This is a sample mmd title block, with
5212− a field spanning multiple lines.
3541+An image with nonempty alt text, occurring by itself in a
3542+paragraph, will be rendered as a figure with a caption. The
3543+image's alt text will be used as the caption.
52133544
5214−See the MultiMarkdown documentation for details. If `pandoc_title_block` or
5215−`yaml_metadata_block` is enabled, it will take precedence over
5216−`mmd_title_block`.
3545+ 
52173546
5218−#### Extension: `abbreviations` ####
3547+How this is rendered depends on the output format. Some output
3548+formats (e.g. RTF) do not yet support figures. In those
3549+formats, you'll just get an image in a paragraph by itself, with
3550+no caption.
52193551
5220−Parses PHP Markdown Extra abbreviation keys, like
3552+If you just want a regular inline image, just make sure it is not
3553+the only thing in the paragraph. One way to do this is to insert a
3554+nonbreaking space after the image:
52213555
5222− *[HTML]: Hypertext Markup Language
3556+ \
52233557
5224−Note that the pandoc document model does not support
5225−abbreviations, so if this extension is enabled, abbreviation keys are
5226−simply skipped (as opposed to being parsed as paragraphs).
3558+Note that in reveal.js slide shows, an image in a paragraph
3559+by itself that has the `stretch` class will fill the screen,
3560+and the caption and figure tags will be omitted.
52273561
5228−#### Extension: `autolink_bare_uris` ####
3562+#### Extension: `link_attributes` ####
52293563
5230−Makes all absolute URIs into links, even when not surrounded by
5231−pointy braces `<...>`.
3564+Attributes can be set on links and images:
52323565
5233−#### Extension: `mmd_link_attributes` ####
3566+ An inline {#id .class width=30 height=20px}
3567+ and a reference ![image][ref] with attributes.
52343568
5235−Parses multimarkdown style key-value attributes on link
5236−and image references. This extension should not be confused with the
5237−[`link_attributes`](#extension-link_attributes) extension.
3569+ [ref]: foo.jpg "optional title" {#id .class key=val key2="val 2"}
52383570
5239− This is a reference ![image][ref] with multimarkdown attributes.
3571+(This syntax is compatible with [PHP Markdown Extra] when only `#id`
3572+and `.class` are used.)
52403573
5241− [ref]: https://path.to/image "Image title" width=20px height=30px
5242− id=myId class="myClass1 myClass2"
3574+For HTML and EPUB, all attributes except `width` and `height` (but
3575+including `srcset` and `sizes`) are passed through as is. The other
3576+writers ignore attributes that are not supported by their output
3577+format.
52433578
5244−#### Extension: `mmd_header_identifiers` ####
3579+The `width` and `height` attributes on images are treated specially. When
3580+used without a unit, the unit is assumed to be pixels. However, any of
3581+the following unit identifiers can be used: `px`, `cm`, `mm`, `in`, `inch`
3582+and `%`. There must not be any spaces between the number and the unit.
3583+For example:
52453584
5246−Parses multimarkdown style heading identifiers (in square brackets,
5247−after the heading but before any trailing `#`s in an ATX heading).
3585+```
3586+{ width=50% }
3587+```
52483588
5249−#### Extension: `compact_definition_lists` ####
3589+- Dimensions are converted to inches for output in page-based formats like
3590+ LaTeX. Dimensions are converted to pixels for output in HTML-like
3591+ formats. Use the `--dpi` option to specify the number of pixels per
3592+ inch. The default is 96dpi.
3593+- The `%` unit is generally relative to some available space.
3594+ For example the above example will render to
3595+ `<img href="file.jpg" style="width: 50%;" />` (HTML),
3596+ `\includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{file.jpg}` (LaTeX), or
3597+ `\externalfigure[file.jpg][width=0.5\textwidth]` (ConTeXt).
3598+- Some output formats have a notion of a class
3599+ ([ConTeXt](http://wiki.contextgarden.net/Using_Graphics#Multiple_Image_Settings))
3600+ or a unique identifier (LaTeX `\caption`), or both (HTML).
3601+- When no `width` or `height` attributes are specified, the fallback
3602+ is to look at the image resolution and the dpi metadata embedded in
3603+ the image file.
52503604
5251−Activates the definition list syntax of pandoc 1.12.x and earlier.
5252−This syntax differs from the one described above under [Definition lists]
5253−in several respects:
3605+Spans
3606+-----
52543607
5255− - No blank line is required between consecutive items of the
5256− definition list.
5257− - To get a "tight" or "compact" list, omit space between consecutive
5258− items; the space between a term and its definition does not affect
5259− anything.
5260− - Lazy wrapping of paragraphs is not allowed: the entire definition must
5261− be indented four spaces.[^6]
3608+#### Extension: `bracketed_spans` ####
52623609
5263−[^6]: To see why laziness is incompatible with relaxing the requirement
5264− of a blank line between items, consider the following example:
3610+A bracketed sequence of inlines, as one would use to begin
3611+a link, will be treated as a span with attributes if it is
3612+followed immediately by attributes:
52653613
5266− bar
5267− : definition
5268− foo
5269− : definition
3614+ [This is *some text*]{.class key="val"}
52703615
5271− Is this a single list item with two definitions of "bar," the first of
5272− which is lazily wrapped, or two list items? To remove the ambiguity
5273− we must either disallow lazy wrapping or require a blank line between
5274− list items.
3616+Footnotes
3617+---------
52753618
5276−#### Extension: `gutenberg` ####
3619+#### Extension: `footnotes` ####
52773620
5278−Use [Project Gutenberg] conventions for `plain` output:
5279−all-caps for strong emphasis, surround by underscores
5280−for regular emphasis, add extra blank space around headings.
3621+Pandoc's Markdown allows footnotes, using the following syntax:
52813622
5282− [Project Gutenberg]: https://www.gutenberg.org
3623+ Here is a footnote reference,[^1] and another.[^longnote]
52833624
5284−#### Extension: `sourcepos` ####
3625+ [^1]: Here is the footnote.
52853626
5286−Include source position attributes when parsing `commonmark`.
5287−For elements that accept attributes, a `data-pos` attribute
5288−is added; other elements are placed in a surrounding
5289−Div or Span elemnet with a `data-pos` attribute.
3627+ [^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
52903628
5291−## Markdown variants
3629+ Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
3630+ belong to the previous footnote.
52923631
5293−In addition to pandoc's extended Markdown, the following Markdown
5294−variants are supported:
3632+ { some.code }
3633+
3634+ The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
3635+ line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
3636+ multi-paragraph list items.
52953637
5296−- `markdown_phpextra` (PHP Markdown Extra)
5297−- `markdown_github` (deprecated GitHub-Flavored Markdown)
5298−- `markdown_mmd` (MultiMarkdown)
5299−- `markdown_strict` (Markdown.pl)
5300−- `commonmark` (CommonMark)
5301−- `gfm` (Github-Flavored Markdown)
5302−- `commonmark_x` (CommonMark with many pandoc extensions)
3638+ This paragraph won't be part of the note, because it
3639+ isn't indented.
53033640
5304−To see which extensions are supported for a given format,
5305−and which are enabled by default, you can use the command
3641+The identifiers in footnote references may not contain spaces, tabs,
3642+or newlines. These identifiers are used only to correlate the
3643+footnote reference with the note itself; in the output, footnotes
3644+will be numbered sequentially.
53063645
5307− pandoc --list-extensions=FORMAT
3646+The footnotes themselves need not be placed at the end of the
3647+document. They may appear anywhere except inside other block elements
3648+(lists, block quotes, tables, etc.). Each footnote should be
3649+separated from surrounding content (including other footnotes)
3650+by blank lines.
53083651
5309−where `FORMAT` is replaced with the name of the format.
3652+#### Extension: `inline_notes` ####
53103653
5311−Note that the list of extensions for `commonmark`,
5312−`gfm`, and `commonmark_x` are defined relative to default
5313−commonmark. So, for example, `backtick_code_blocks`
5314−does not appear as an extension, since it is enabled by
5315−default and cannot be disabled.
3654+Inline footnotes are also allowed (though, unlike regular notes,
3655+they cannot contain multiple paragraphs). The syntax is as follows:
53163656
5317−# Citations
3657+ Here is an inline note.^[Inlines notes are easier to write, since
3658+ you don't have to pick an identifier and move down to type the
3659+ note.]
53183660
5319−When the `--citeproc` option is used, pandoc can automatically generate
5320−citations and a bibliography in a number of styles. Basic usage is
3661+Inline and regular footnotes may be mixed freely.
53213662
5322− pandoc --citeproc myinput.txt
3663+Citations
3664+---------
53233665
5324−To use this feature, you will need to have
3666+#### Extension: `citations` ####
53253667
5326−- a document containing citations (see [Extension: `citations`]);
5327−- a source of bibliographic data: either an external bibliography
5328− file or a list of `references` in the document's YAML metadata
5329−- optionally, a [CSL] citation style.
3668+Using an external filter, `pandoc-citeproc`, pandoc can automatically generate
3669+citations and a bibliography in a number of styles. Basic usage is
53303670
5331−## Specifying bibliographic data
3671+ pandoc --filter pandoc-citeproc myinput.txt
53323672
5333−You can specify an external bibliography using the
5334−`bibliography` metadata field in a YAML metadata section or the
5335−`--bibliography` command line argument. If you want to use
5336−multiple bibliography files, you can supply multiple
5337−`--bibliography` arguments or set `bibliography` metadata field
5338−to YAML array. A bibliography may have any of these formats:
3673+In order to use this feature, you will need to specify a bibliography file
3674+using the `bibliography` metadata field in a YAML metadata section, or
3675+`--bibliography` command line argument. You can supply multiple `--bibliography`
3676+arguments or set `bibliography` metadata field to YAML array, if you want to
3677+use multiple bibliography files. The bibliography may have any of these
3678+formats:
53393679
53403680 Format File extension
53413681 ------------ --------------
53423682 BibLaTeX .bib
53433683 BibTeX .bibtex
3684+ Copac .copac
53443685 CSL JSON .json
53453686 CSL YAML .yaml
3687+ EndNote .enl
3688+ EndNote XML .xml
3689+ ISI .wos
3690+ MEDLINE .medline
3691+ MODS .mods
3692+ RIS .ris
53463693
53473694Note that `.bib` can be used with both BibTeX and BibLaTeX files;
5348−use the extension `.bibtex` to force interpretation as BibTeX.
3695+use `.bibtex` to force BibTeX.
3696+
3697+Note that `pandoc-citeproc --bib2json` and `pandoc-citeproc --bib2yaml`
3698+can produce `.json` and `.yaml` files from any of the supported formats.
53493699
5350−In BibTeX and BibLaTeX databases, pandoc parses LaTeX markup
5351−inside fields such as `title`; in CSL YAML databases, pandoc
5352−Markdown; and in CSL JSON databases, an [HTML-like markup][CSL
5353−markup specs]:
3700+In-field markup: In BibTeX and BibLaTeX databases, pandoc-citeproc parses
3701+a subset of LaTeX markup; in CSL YAML databases, pandoc Markdown; and in CSL JSON databases, an [HTML-like markup][CSL markup specs]:
53543702
53553703`<i>...</i>`
53563704: italics
@@ -5370,11 +3718,14 @@ markup specs]:
53703718`<span class="nocase">...</span>`
53713719: prevent a phrase from being capitalized as title case
53723720
5373−As an alternative to specifying a bibliography file using
5374−`--bibliography` or the YAML metadata field `bibliography`, you
5375−can include the citation data directly in the `references` field
5376−of the document's YAML metadata. The field should contain an
5377−array of YAML-encoded references, for example:
3721+`pandoc-citeproc -j` and `-y` interconvert the CSL JSON
3722+and CSL YAML formats as far as possible.
3723+
3724+As an alternative to specifying a bibliography file using `--bibliography`
3725+or the YAML metadata field `bibliography`, you can include
3726+the citation data directly in the `references` field of the
3727+document's YAML metadata. The field should contain an array of
3728+YAML-encoded references, for example:
53783729
53793730 ---
53803731 references:
@@ -5390,273 +3741,322 @@ array of YAML-encoded references, for example:
53903741 - - 1953
53913742 - 4
53923743 - 25
5393− title: 'Molecular structure of nucleic acids: a structure for
5394− deoxyribose nucleic acid'
3744+ title: 'Molecular structure of nucleic acids: a structure for deoxyribose
3745+ nucleic acid'
53953746 title-short: Molecular structure of nucleic acids
53963747 container-title: Nature
53973748 volume: 171
53983749 issue: 4356
53993750 page: 737-738
54003751 DOI: 10.1038/171737a0
5401− URL: https://www.nature.com/articles/171737a0
3752+ URL: http://www.nature.com/nature/journal/v171/n4356/abs/171737a0.html
54023753 language: en-GB
54033754 ...
54043755
5405−If both an external bibliography and inline (YAML metadata)
5406−references are provided, both will be used. In case of
5407−conflicting `id`s, the inline references will take precedence.
3756+(`pandoc-citeproc --bib2yaml` can produce these from a bibliography file in one
3757+of the supported formats.)
3758+
3759+Citations and references can be formatted using any style supported by the
3760+[Citation Style Language], listed in the [Zotero Style Repository].
3761+These files are specified using the `--csl` option or the `csl` metadata field.
3762+By default, `pandoc-citeproc` will use the [Chicago Manual of Style] author-date
3763+format. The CSL project provides further information on [finding and editing styles].
3764+
3765+To make your citations hyperlinks to the corresponding bibliography
3766+entries, add `link-citations: true` to your YAML metadata.
3767+
3768+Citations go inside square brackets and are separated by semicolons.
3769+Each citation must have a key, composed of '@' + the citation
3770+identifier from the database, and may optionally have a prefix,
3771+a locator, and a suffix. The citation key must begin with a letter, digit,
3772+or `_`, and may contain alphanumerics, `_`, and internal punctuation
3773+characters (`:.#$%&-+?<>~/`). Here are some examples:
3774+
3775+ Blah blah [see @doe99, pp. 33-35; also @smith04, chap. 1].
3776+
3777+ Blah blah [@doe99, pp. 33-35, 38-39 and *passim*].
3778+
3779+ Blah blah [@smith04; @doe99].
3780+
3781+`pandoc-citeproc` detects locator terms in the [CSL locale files].
3782+Either abbreviated or unabbreviated forms are accepted. In the `en-US`
3783+locale, locator terms can be written in either singular or plural forms,
3784+as `book`, `bk.`/`bks.`; `chapter`, `chap.`/`chaps.`; `column`,
3785+`col.`/`cols.`; `figure`, `fig.`/`figs.`; `folio`, `fol.`/`fols.`;
3786+`number`, `no.`/`nos.`; `line`, `l.`/`ll.`; `note`, `n.`/`nn.`; `opus`,
3787+`op.`/`opp.`; `page`, `p.`/`pp.`; `paragraph`, `para.`/`paras.`; `part`,
3788+`pt.`/`pts.`; `section`, `sec.`/`secs.`; `sub verbo`, `s.v.`/`s.vv.`;
3789+`verse`, `v.`/`vv.`; `volume`, `vol.`/`vols.`; `¶`/`¶¶`; `§`/`§§`. If no
3790+locator term is used, "page" is assumed.
3791+
3792+A minus sign (`-`) before the `@` will suppress mention of
3793+the author in the citation. This can be useful when the
3794+author is already mentioned in the text:
3795+
3796+ Smith says blah [-@smith04].
3797+
3798+You can also write an in-text citation, as follows:
3799+
3800+ @smith04 says blah.
3801+
3802+ @smith04 [p. 33] says blah.
3803+
3804+If the style calls for a list of works cited, it will be placed
3805+at the end of the document. Normally, you will want to end your
3806+document with an appropriate header:
3807+
3808+ last paragraph...
3809+
3810+ # References
54083811
5409−Note that `pandoc` can be used to produce such a YAML metadata
5410−section from a BibTeX, BibLaTeX, or CSL JSON bibliography:
3812+The bibliography will be inserted after this header. Note that
3813+the `unnumbered` class will be added to this header, so that the
3814+section will not be numbered.
54113815
5412− pandoc chem.bib -s -f biblatex -t markdown
5413− pandoc chem.json -s -f csljson -t markdown
3816+If you want to include items in the bibliography without actually
3817+citing them in the body text, you can define a dummy `nocite` metadata
3818+field and put the citations there:
54143819
5415−Indeed, `pandoc` can convert between any of these
5416−citation formats:
3820+ ---
3821+ nocite: |
3822+ @item1, @item2
3823+ ...
54173824
5418− pandoc chem.bib -s -f biblatex -t csljson
5419− pandoc chem.yaml -s -f markdown -t biblatex
3825+ @item3
54203826
5421−Running pandoc on a bibliography file with the `--citeproc`
5422−option will create a formatted bibliography in the format
5423−of your choice:
3827+In this example, the document will contain a citation for `item3`
3828+only, but the bibliography will contain entries for `item1`, `item2`, and
3829+`item3`.
54243830
5425− pandoc chem.bib -s --citeproc -o chem.html
5426− pandoc chem.bib -s --citeproc -o chem.pdf
3831+It is possible to create a bibliography with all the citations,
3832+whether or not they appear in the document, by using a wildcard:
54273833
5428−### Capitalization in titles
3834+ ---
3835+ nocite: |
3836+ @*
3837+ ...
54293838
5430−If you are using a bibtex or biblatex bibliography, then observe
5431−the following rules:
3839+For LaTeX or PDF output, you can also use [`natbib`] or [`biblatex`]
3840+to render bibliography. In order to do so, specify bibliography files as
3841+outlined above, and add `--natbib` or `--biblatex` argument to `pandoc`
3842+invocation. Bear in mind that bibliography files have to be in respective
3843+format (either BibTeX or BibLaTeX).
54323844
5433− - English titles should be in title case. Non-English titles should
5434− be in sentence case, and the `langid` field in biblatex should be
5435− set to the relevant language. (The following values are treated
5436− as English: `american`, `british`, `canadian`, `english`,
5437− `australian`, `newzealand`, `USenglish`, or `UKenglish`.)
3845+For more information, see the [pandoc-citeproc man page].
54383846
5439− - As is standard with bibtex/biblatex, proper names should be
5440− protected with curly braces so that they won't be lowercased
5441− in styles that call for sentence case. For example:
3847+[CSL markup specs]: http://docs.citationstyles.org/en/1.0/release-notes.html#rich-text-markup-within-fields
3848+[Chicago Manual of Style]: http://chicagomanualofstyle.org
3849+[Citation Style Language]: http://citationstyles.org
3850+[Zotero Style Repository]: https://www.zotero.org/styles
3851+[finding and editing styles]: http://citationstyles.org/styles/
3852+[CSL locale files]: https://github.com/citation-style-language/locales
3853+[pandoc-citeproc man page]: https://github.com/jgm/pandoc-citeproc/blob/master/man/pandoc-citeproc.1.md
54423854
5443− title = {My Dinner with {Andre}}
3855+Non-pandoc extensions
3856+---------------------
54443857
5445− - In addition, words that should remain lowercase (or camelCase)
5446− should be protected:
3858+The following Markdown syntax extensions are not enabled by default
3859+in pandoc, but may be enabled by adding `+EXTENSION` to the format
3860+name, where `EXTENSION` is the name of the extension. Thus, for
3861+example, `markdown+hard_line_breaks` is Markdown with hard line breaks.
54473862
5448− title = {Spin Wave Dispersion on the {nm} Scale}
3863+#### Extension: `old_dashes` ####
54493864
5450− Though this is not necessary in bibtex/biblatex, it is necessary
5451− with citeproc, which stores titles internally in sentence case,
5452− and converts to title case in styles that require it. Here we
5453− protect "nm" so that it doesn't get converted to "Nm" at this stage.
3865+Selects the pandoc <= 1.8.2.1 behavior for parsing smart dashes:
3866+`-` before a numeral is an en-dash, and `--` is an em-dash.
3867+This option only has an effect if `smart` is enabled. It is
3868+selected automatically for `textile` input.
54543869
5455−If you are using a CSL bibliography (either JSON or YAML), then observe
5456−the following rules:
3870+#### Extension: `angle_brackets_escapable` ####
54573871
5458− - All titles should be in sentence case.
3872+Allow `<` and `>` to be backslash-escaped, as they can be in
3873+GitHub flavored Markdown but not original Markdown. This is
3874+implied by pandoc's default `all_symbols_escapable`.
54593875
5460− - Use the `language` field for non-English titles to prevent their
5461− conversion to title case in styles that call for this. (Conversion
5462− happens only if `language` begins with `en` or is left empty.)
3876+#### Extension: `lists_without_preceding_blankline` ####
54633877
5464− - Protect words that should not be converted to title case using
5465− this syntax:
3878+Allow a list to occur right after a paragraph, with no intervening
3879+blank space.
54663880
5467− Spin wave dispersion on the <span class="nocase">nm</span> scale
3881+#### Extension: `four_space_rule` ####
54683882
5469−### Conference Papers, Published vs. Unpublished
3883+Selects the pandoc <= 2.0 behavior for parsing lists, so that
3884+four spaces indent are needed for list item continuation
3885+paragraphs.
54703886
5471−For a formally published conference paper, use the biblatex entry type
5472−`inproceedings` (which will be mapped to CSL `paper-conference`).
3887+#### Extension: `spaced_reference_links` ####
54733888
5474−For an unpublished manuscript, use the biblatex entry type
5475−`unpublished` without an `eventtitle` field (this entry type
5476−will be mapped to CSL `manuscript`).
3889+Allow whitespace between the two components of a reference link,
3890+for example,
54773891
5478−For a talk, an unpublished conference paper, or a poster
5479−presentation, use the biblatex entry type `unpublished` with an
5480−`eventtitle` field (this entry type will be mapped to CSL
5481−`speech`). Use the biblatex `type` field to indicate the type,
5482−e.g. "Paper", or "Poster". `venue` and `eventdate` may be useful
5483−too, though `eventdate` will not be rendered by most CSL styles.
5484−Note that `venue` is for the event's venue, unlike `location`
5485−which describes the publisher's location; do not use the latter
5486−for an unpublished conference paper.
3892+ [foo] [bar].
54873893
3894+#### Extension: `hard_line_breaks` ####
54883895
5489−## Specifying a citation style
3896+Causes all newlines within a paragraph to be interpreted as hard line
3897+breaks instead of spaces.
54903898
5491−Citations and references can be formatted using any style supported by the
5492−[Citation Style Language], listed in the [Zotero Style Repository].
5493−These files are specified using the `--csl` option or the `csl`
5494−(or `citation-style`) metadata field. By default, pandoc will
5495−use the [Chicago Manual of Style] author-date format. (You can
5496−override this default by copying a CSL style of your choice
5497−to `default.csl` in your user data directory.)
5498−The CSL project provides further information on [finding and
5499−editing styles].
5500−
5501−The `--citation-abbreviations` option (or the
5502−`citation-abbreviations` metadata field) may be used to specify
5503−a JSON file containing abbreviations of journals that should be
5504−used in formatted bibliographies when `form="short"` is
5505−specified. The format of the file can be illustrated with an
5506−example:
3899+#### Extension: `ignore_line_breaks` ####
55073900
3901+Causes newlines within a paragraph to be ignored, rather than being
3902+treated as spaces or as hard line breaks. This option is intended for
3903+use with East Asian languages where spaces are not used between words,
3904+but text is divided into lines for readability.
55083905
5509− { "default": {
5510− "container-title": {
5511− "Lloyd's Law Reports": "Lloyd's Rep",
5512− "Estates Gazette": "EG",
5513− "Scots Law Times": "SLT"
5514− }
5515− }
5516− }
3906+#### Extension: `east_asian_line_breaks` ####
55173907
3908+Causes newlines within a paragraph to be ignored, rather than
3909+being treated as spaces or as hard line breaks, when they occur
3910+between two East Asian wide characters. This is a better choice
3911+than `ignore_line_breaks` for texts that include a mix of East
3912+Asian wide characters and other characters.
55183913
5519−## Citations in note styles
3914+#### Extension: `emoji` ####
55203915
5521−Pandoc's citation processing is designed to allow you to
5522−move between author-date, numerical, and note styles without
5523−modifying the markdown source. When you're using a note
5524−style, avoid inserting footnotes manually. Instead, insert
5525−citations just as you would in an author-date style---for
5526−example,
3916+Parses textual emojis like `:smile:` as Unicode emoticons.
55273917
5528− Blah blah [@foo, p. 33].
3918+#### Extension: `tex_math_single_backslash` ####
55293919
5530−The footnote will be created automatically. Pandoc will take
5531−care of removing the space and moving the note before or
5532−after the period, depending on the setting of
5533−`notes-after-punctuation`, as described below in [Other relevant
5534−metadata fields].
3920+Causes anything between `\(` and `\)` to be interpreted as inline
3921+TeX math, and anything between `\[` and `\]` to be interpreted
3922+as display TeX math. Note: a drawback of this extension is that
3923+it precludes escaping `(` and `[`.
55353924
5536−In some cases you may need to put a citation inside a regular
5537−footnote. Normal citations in footnotes (such as `[@foo, p.
5538−33]`) will be rendered in parentheses. In-text citations (such
5539−as `@foo [p. 33]`) will be rendered without parentheses. (A
5540−comma will be added if appropriate.) Thus:
3925+#### Extension: `tex_math_double_backslash` ####
55413926
5542− [^1]: Some studies [@foo; @bar, p. 33] show that
5543− frubulicious zoosnaps are quantical. For a survey
5544− of the literature, see @baz [chap. 1].
3927+Causes anything between `\\(` and `\\)` to be interpreted as inline
3928+TeX math, and anything between `\\[` and `\\]` to be interpreted
3929+as display TeX math.
55453930
5546−## Raw content in a style
3931+#### Extension: `markdown_attribute` ####
55473932
5548−To include raw content in a prefix, suffix, delimiter, or term,
5549−surround it with these tags indicating the format:
3933+By default, pandoc interprets material inside block-level tags as Markdown.
3934+This extension changes the behavior so that Markdown is only parsed
3935+inside block-level tags if the tags have the attribute `markdown=1`.
55503936
5551− {{jats}}<ref>{{/jats}}
3937+#### Extension: `mmd_title_block` ####
55523938
5553−Without the tags, the string will be interpreted as a string
5554−and escaped in the output, rather than being passed through raw.
3939+Enables a [MultiMarkdown] style title block at the top of
3940+the document, for example:
55553941
5556−This feature allows stylesheets to be customized to give
5557−different output for different output formats. However,
5558−stylesheets customized in this way will not be usable
5559−by other CSL implementations.
3942+ Title: My title
3943+ Author: John Doe
3944+ Date: September 1, 2008
3945+ Comment: This is a sample mmd title block, with
3946+ a field spanning multiple lines.
55603947
3948+See the MultiMarkdown documentation for details. If `pandoc_title_block` or
3949+`yaml_metadata_block` is enabled, it will take precedence over
3950+`mmd_title_block`.
55613951
3952+#### Extension: `abbreviations` ####
55623953
5563−## Placement of the bibliography
3954+Parses PHP Markdown Extra abbreviation keys, like
55643955
5565−If the style calls for a list of works cited, it will be placed
5566−in a div with id `refs`, if one exists:
3956+ *[HTML]: Hypertext Markup Language
55673957
5568− ::: {#refs}
5569− :::
3958+Note that the pandoc document model does not support
3959+abbreviations, so if this extension is enabled, abbreviation keys are
3960+simply skipped (as opposed to being parsed as paragraphs).
55703961
5571−Otherwise, it will be placed at the end of the document.
5572−Generation of the bibliography can be suppressed by setting
5573−`suppress-bibliography: true` in the YAML metadata.
3962+#### Extension: `autolink_bare_uris` ####
55743963
5575−If you wish the bibliography to have a section heading, you can
5576−set `reference-section-title` in the metadata, or put the heading
5577−at the beginning of the div with id `refs` (if you are using it)
5578−or at the end of your document:
3964+Makes all absolute URIs into links, even when not surrounded by
3965+pointy braces `<...>`.
55793966
5580− last paragraph...
3967+#### Extension: `mmd_link_attributes` ####
55813968
5582− # References
3969+Parses multimarkdown style key-value attributes on link
3970+and image references. This extension should not be confused with the
3971+[`link_attributes`](#extension-link_attributes) extension.
55833972
5584−The bibliography will be inserted after this heading. Note that
5585−the `unnumbered` class will be added to this heading, so that the
5586−section will not be numbered.
3973+ This is a reference ![image][ref] with multimarkdown attributes.
55873974
5588−## Including uncited items in the bibliography
3975+ [ref]: http://path.to/image "Image title" width=20px height=30px
3976+ id=myId class="myClass1 myClass2"
55893977
5590−If you want to include items in the bibliography without actually
5591−citing them in the body text, you can define a dummy `nocite` metadata
5592−field and put the citations there:
3978+#### Extension: `mmd_header_identifiers` ####
55933979
5594− ---
5595− nocite: |
5596− @item1, @item2
5597− ...
3980+Parses multimarkdown style header identifiers (in square brackets,
3981+after the header but before any trailing `#`s in an ATX header).
55983982
5599− @item3
3983+#### Extension: `compact_definition_lists` ####
56003984
5601−In this example, the document will contain a citation for `item3`
5602−only, but the bibliography will contain entries for `item1`, `item2`, and
5603−`item3`.
3985+Activates the definition list syntax of pandoc 1.12.x and earlier.
3986+This syntax differs from the one described above under [Definition lists]
3987+in several respects:
56043988
5605−It is possible to create a bibliography with all the citations,
5606−whether or not they appear in the document, by using a wildcard:
3989+ - No blank line is required between consecutive items of the
3990+ definition list.
3991+ - To get a "tight" or "compact" list, omit space between consecutive
3992+ items; the space between a term and its definition does not affect
3993+ anything.
3994+ - Lazy wrapping of paragraphs is not allowed: the entire definition must
3995+ be indented four spaces.[^6]
56073996
5608− ---
5609− nocite: |
5610− @*
5611− ...
3997+[^6]: To see why laziness is incompatible with relaxing the requirement
3998+ of a blank line between items, consider the following example:
56123999
5613−For LaTeX output, you can also use [`natbib`] or [`biblatex`] to
5614−render the bibliography. In order to do so, specify bibliography
5615−files as outlined above, and add `--natbib` or `--biblatex`
5616−argument to `pandoc` invocation. Bear in mind that bibliography
5617−files have to be in either BibTeX (for `--natbib`)
5618−or BibLaTeX (for `--biblatex`) format.
4000+ bar
4001+ : definition
4002+ foo
4003+ : definition
56194004
5620−## Other relevant metadata fields
4005+ Is this a single list item with two definitions of "bar," the first of
4006+ which is lazily wrapped, or two list items? To remove the ambiguity
4007+ we must either disallow lazy wrapping or require a blank line between
4008+ list items.
56214009
5622−A few other metadata fields affect bibliography formatting:
4010+Markdown variants
4011+-----------------
56234012
5624−`link-citations`
5625−: If true, citations will be
5626− hyperlinked to the corresponding bibliography entries
5627− (for author-date and numerical styles only).
4013+In addition to pandoc's extended Markdown, the following Markdown
4014+variants are supported:
56284015
5629−`lang`
5630−: The `lang` field will affect how the style is localized,
5631− for example in the translation of labels, the use
5632− of quotation marks, and the way items are sorted.
5633− (For backwards compatibility, `locale` may be used instead
5634− of `lang`, but this use is deprecated.)
5635−
5636− A BCP 47 language tag is expected: for example, `en`,
5637− `de`, `en-US`, `fr-CA`, `ug-Cyrl`. The unicode extension
5638− syntax (after `-u-`) may be used to specify options for
5639− collation (sorting) more precisely. Here are some examples:
5640−
5641− - `zh-u-co-pinyin` -- Chinese with the Pinyin collation.
5642− - `es-u-co-trad` -- Spanish with the traditional collation
5643− (with `Ch` sorting after `C`).
5644− - `fr-u-kb` -- French with "backwards" accent sorting
5645− (with `coté` sorting after `côte`).
5646− - `en-US-u-kf-upper` -- English with uppercase letters sorting
5647− before lower (default is lower before upper).
5648−
5649−`notes-after-punctuation`
5650−: If true (the default), pandoc will put footnote citations
5651− after following punctuation. For example, if the source
5652− contains `blah blah [@jones99].`, the result will look like
5653− `blah blah.[^1]`, with the note moved after the period and
5654− the space collapsed. If false, the space will still be
5655− collapsed, but the footnote will not be moved after the
5656− punctuation.
5657−
5658−
5659−# Slide shows
4016+`markdown_phpextra` (PHP Markdown Extra)
4017+: `footnotes`, `pipe_tables`, `raw_html`, `markdown_attribute`,
4018+ `fenced_code_blocks`, `definition_lists`, `intraword_underscores`,
4019+ `header_attributes`, `link_attributes`, `abbreviations`,
4020+ `shortcut_reference_links`, `spaced_reference_links`.
4021+
4022+`markdown_github` (deprecated GitHub-Flavored Markdown)
4023+: `pipe_tables`, `raw_html`, `fenced_code_blocks`, `gfm_auto_identifiers`,
4024+ `ascii_identifiers`, `backtick_code_blocks`, `autolink_bare_uris`,
4025+ `space_in_atx_header`, `intraword_underscores`, `strikeout`,
4026+ `emoji`, `shortcut_reference_links`, `angle_brackets_escapable`,
4027+ `lists_without_preceding_blankline`.
4028+
4029+`markdown_mmd` (MultiMarkdown)
4030+: `pipe_tables`, `raw_html`, `markdown_attribute`, `mmd_link_attributes`,
4031+ `tex_math_double_backslash`, `intraword_underscores`,
4032+ `mmd_title_block`, `footnotes`, `definition_lists`,
4033+ `all_symbols_escapable`, `implicit_header_references`,
4034+ `auto_identifiers`, `mmd_header_identifiers`,
4035+ `shortcut_reference_links`, `implicit_figures`,
4036+ `superscript`, `subscript`, `backtick_code_blocks`,
4037+ `spaced_reference_links`, `raw_attribute`.
4038+
4039+`markdown_strict` (Markdown.pl)
4040+: `raw_html`, `shortcut_reference_links`,
4041+ `spaced_reference_links`.
4042+
4043+We also support `commonmark` and `gfm` (GitHub-Flavored Markdown,
4044+which is implemented as a set of extensions on `commonmark`).
4045+
4046+Note, however, that `commonmark` and `gfm` have limited support
4047+for extensions. Only those listed below (and `smart` and
4048+`raw_tex`) will work. The extensions can, however, all be
4049+individually disabled.
4050+Also, `raw_tex` only affects `gfm` output, not input.
4051+
4052+`gfm` (GitHub-Flavored Markdown)
4053+: `pipe_tables`, `raw_html`, `fenced_code_blocks`, `auto_identifiers`,
4054+ `ascii_identifiers`, `backtick_code_blocks`, `autolink_bare_uris`,
4055+ `intraword_underscores`, `strikeout`, `hard_line_breaks`, `emoji`,
4056+ `shortcut_reference_links`, `angle_brackets_escapable`.
4057+
4058+Producing slide shows with pandoc
4059+=================================
56604060
56614061You can use pandoc to produce an HTML + JavaScript slide presentation
56624062that can be viewed via a web browser. There are five ways to do this,
@@ -5704,21 +4104,18 @@ To produce an HTML/JavaScript slide show, simply type
57044104
57054105where `FORMAT` is either `s5`, `slidy`, `slideous`, `dzslides`, or `revealjs`.
57064106
5707−For Slidy, Slideous, reveal.js, and S5, the file produced by
5708−pandoc with the `-s/--standalone` option embeds a link to
5709−JavaScript and CSS files, which are assumed to be available at
5710−the relative path `s5/default` (for S5), `slideous` (for
5711−Slideous), `reveal.js` (for reveal.js), or at the Slidy website
5712−at `w3.org` (for Slidy). (These paths can be changed by setting
5713−the `slidy-url`, `slideous-url`, `revealjs-url`, or `s5-url`
5714−variables; see [Variables for HTML slides], above.) For
5715−DZSlides, the (relatively short) JavaScript and CSS are included
5716−in the file by default.
5717−
5718−With all HTML slide formats, the `--self-contained` option can
5719−be used to produce a single file that contains all of the data
5720−necessary to display the slide show, including linked scripts,
5721−stylesheets, images, and videos.
4107+For Slidy, Slideous, reveal.js, and S5, the file produced by pandoc with the
4108+`-s/--standalone` option embeds a link to JavaScript and CSS files, which are
4109+assumed to be available at the relative path `s5/default` (for S5), `slideous`
4110+(for Slideous), `reveal.js` (for reveal.js), or at the Slidy website at
4111+`w3.org` (for Slidy). (These paths can be changed by setting the `slidy-url`,
4112+`slideous-url`, `revealjs-url`, or `s5-url` variables; see [Variables for slides],
4113+above.) For DZSlides, the (relatively short) JavaScript and CSS are included in
4114+the file by default.
4115+
4116+With all HTML slide formats, the `--self-contained` option can be used to
4117+produce a single file that contains all of the data necessary to display the
4118+slide show, including linked scripts, stylesheets, images, and videos.
57224119
57234120To produce a PDF slide show using beamer, type
57244121
@@ -5731,13 +4128,14 @@ To produce a Powerpoint slide show, type
57314128
57324129 pandoc habits.txt -o habits.pptx
57334130
5734−## Structuring the slide show
4131+Structuring the slide show
4132+--------------------------
57354133
5736−By default, the *slide level* is the highest heading level in
4134+By default, the *slide level* is the highest header level in
57374135the hierarchy that is followed immediately by content, and not another
5738−heading, somewhere in the document. In the example above, level-1 headings
5739−are always followed by level-2 headings, which are followed by content,
5740−so the slide level is 2. This default can be overridden using
4136+header, somewhere in the document. In the example above, level 1 headers
4137+are always followed by level 2 headers, which are followed by content,
4138+so 2 is the slide level. This default can be overridden using
57414139the `--slide-level` option.
57424140
57434141The document is carved up into slides according to the following
@@ -5745,21 +4143,17 @@ rules:
57454143
57464144 * A horizontal rule always starts a new slide.
57474145
5748− * A heading at the slide level always starts a new slide.
4146+ * A header at the slide level always starts a new slide.
57494147
5750− * Headings *below* the slide level in the hierarchy create
5751− headings *within* a slide. (In beamer, a "block" will be
5752− created. If the heading has the class `example`, an
5753− `exampleblock` environment will be used; if it has the class
5754− `alert`, an `alertblock` will be used; otherwise a regular
5755− `block` will be used.)
4148+ * Headers *below* the slide level in the hierarchy create
4149+ headers *within* a slide.
57564150
5757− * Headings *above* the slide level in the hierarchy create
4151+ * Headers *above* the slide level in the hierarchy create
57584152 "title slides," which just contain the section title
57594153 and help to break the slide show into sections.
5760− Non-slide content under these headings will be included
5761− on the title slide (for HTML slide shows) or in a
5762− subsequent slide with the same title (for beamer).
4154+
4155+ * Content *above* the slide level will not appear in the slide
4156+ show.
57634157
57644158 * A title page is constructed automatically from the document's title
57654159 block, if present. (In the case of beamer, this can be disabled
@@ -5767,57 +4161,32 @@ rules:
57674161
57684162These rules are designed to support many different styles of slide show. If
57694163you don't care about structuring your slides into sections and subsections,
5770−you can just use level-1 headings for all each slide. (In that case, level-1
4164+you can just use level 1 headers for all each slide. (In that case, level 1
57714165will be the slide level.) But you can also structure the slide show into
57724166sections, as in the example above.
57734167
57744168Note: in reveal.js slide shows, if slide level is 2, a two-dimensional
5775−layout will be produced, with level-1 headings building horizontally
5776−and level-2 headings building vertically. It is not recommended that
4169+layout will be produced, with level 1 headers building horizontally
4170+and level 2 headers building vertically. It is not recommended that
57774171you use deeper nesting of section levels with reveal.js.
57784172
5779−## Incremental lists
4173+Incremental lists
4174+-----------------
57804175
57814176By default, these writers produce lists that display "all at once."
57824177If you want your lists to display incrementally (one item at a time),
57834178use the `-i` option. If you want a particular list to depart from the
5784−default, put it in a `div` block with class `incremental` or
5785−`nonincremental`. So, for example, using the `fenced div` syntax, the
5786−following would be incremental regardless of the document default:
5787−
5788− ::: incremental
5789−
5790− - Eat spaghetti
5791− - Drink wine
5792−
5793− :::
5794−
5795−or
5796−
5797− ::: nonincremental
5798−
5799− - Eat spaghetti
5800− - Drink wine
5801−
5802− :::
5803−
5804−While using `incremental` and `nonincremental` divs are the
5805−recommended method of setting incremental lists on a per-case basis,
5806−an older method is also supported: putting lists inside a blockquote
5807−will depart from the document default (that is, it will display
5808−incrementally without the `-i` option and all at once with the `-i`
5809−option):
4179+default (that is, to display incrementally without the `-i` option and
4180+all at once with the `-i` option), put it in a block quote:
58104181
58114182 > - Eat spaghetti
58124183 > - Drink wine
58134184
5814−Both methods allow incremental and nonincremental lists to be mixed
5815−in a single document.
4185+In this way incremental and nonincremental lists can be mixed in
4186+a single document.
58164187
5817−Note: Neither the `-i/--incremental` option nor any of the
5818−methods described here currently works for PowerPoint output.
5819−
5820−## Inserting pauses
4188+Inserting pauses
4189+----------------
58214190
58224191You can add "pauses" within a slide by including a paragraph containing
58234192three dots, separated by spaces:
@@ -5830,9 +4199,8 @@ three dots, separated by spaces:
58304199
58314200 content after the pause
58324201
5833−Note: this feature is not yet implemented for PowerPoint output.
5834−
5835−## Styling the slides
4202+Styling the slides
4203+------------------
58364204
58374205You can change the style of HTML slides by putting customized CSS files
58384206in `$DATADIR/s5/default` (for S5), `$DATADIR/slidy` (for Slidy),
@@ -5857,9 +4225,9 @@ To style beamer slides, you can specify a `theme`, `colortheme`,
58574225
58584226 pandoc -t beamer habits.txt -V theme:Warsaw -o habits.pdf
58594227
5860−Note that heading attributes will turn into slide attributes
4228+Note that header attributes will turn into slide attributes
58614229(on a `<div>` or `<section>`) in HTML slide formats, allowing you
5862−to style individual slides. In beamer, the only heading attribute
4230+to style individual slides. In beamer, the only header attribute
58634231that affects slides is the `allowframebreaks` class, which sets the
58644232`allowframebreaks` option, causing multiple slides to be created
58654233if the content overfills the frame. This is recommended especially for
@@ -5867,10 +4235,11 @@ bibliographies:
58674235
58684236 # References {.allowframebreaks}
58694237
5870−## Speaker notes
4238+Speaker notes
4239+-------------
58714240
5872−Speaker notes are supported in reveal.js and PowerPoint (pptx)
5873−output. You can add notes to your Markdown document thus:
4241+reveal.js has good support for speaker notes. You can add notes to your
4242+Markdown document thus:
58744243
58754244 ::: notes
58764245
@@ -5881,14 +4250,12 @@ output. You can add notes to your Markdown document thus:
58814250
58824251 :::
58834252
5884−To show the notes window in reveal.js, press `s` while viewing the
5885−presentation. Speaker notes in PowerPoint will be available, as usual,
5886−in handouts and presenter view.
5887−
4253+To show the notes window, press `s` while viewing the presentation.
58884254Notes are not yet supported for other slide formats, but the notes
58894255will not appear on the slides themselves.
58904256
5891−## Columns
4257+Columns
4258+-------
58924259
58934260To put material in side by side columns, you can use a native
58944261div container with class `columns`, containing two or more div
@@ -5903,46 +4270,12 @@ containers with class `column` and a `width` attribute:
59034270 :::
59044271 ::::::::::::::
59054272
5906−### Additional columns attributes in beamer
5907−
5908−The div containers with classes `columns` and `column` can optionally have
5909−an `align` attribute.
5910−The class `columns` can optionally have a `totalwidth` attribute or an
5911−`onlytextwidth` class.
5912−
5913− :::::::::::::: {.columns align=center totalwidth=8em}
5914− ::: {.column width="40%"}
5915− contents...
5916− :::
5917− ::: {.column width="60%" align=bottom}
5918− contents...
5919− :::
5920− ::::::::::::::
5921−
5922−The `align` attributes on `columns` and `column` can be used with the
5923−values `top`, `top-baseline`, `center` and `bottom` to vertically align
5924−the columns. It defaults to `top` in `columns`.
5925−
5926−The `totalwidth` attribute limits the width of the columns to the given value.
5927−
5928− :::::::::::::: {.columns align=top .onlytextwidth}
5929− ::: {.column width="40%" align=center}
5930− contents...
5931− :::
5932− ::: {.column width="60%"}
5933− contents...
5934− :::
5935− ::::::::::::::
5936−
5937−The class `onlytextwidth` sets the `totalwidth` to `\textwidth`.
5938−
5939−See Section 12.7 of the [Beamer User's Guide] for more details.
5940−
5941−## Frame attributes in beamer
4273+Frame attributes in beamer
4274+--------------------------
59424275
59434276Sometimes it is necessary to add the LaTeX `[fragile]` option to
59444277a frame in beamer (for example, when using the `minted` environment).
5945−This can be forced by adding the `fragile` class to the heading
4278+This can be forced by adding the `fragile` class to the header
59464279introducing the slide:
59474280
59484281 # Fragile slide {.fragile}
@@ -5950,64 +4283,13 @@ introducing the slide:
59504283All of the other frame attributes described in Section 8.1 of
59514284the [Beamer User's Guide] may also be used: `allowdisplaybreaks`,
59524285`allowframebreaks`, `b`, `c`, `t`, `environment`, `label`, `plain`,
5953−`shrink`, `standout`, `noframenumbering`.
5954−
5955−## Background in reveal.js and beamer
5956−
5957−Background images can be added to self-contained reveal.js slideshows and
5958−to beamer slideshows.
5959−
5960−For the same image on every slide, use the configuration
5961−option `background-image` either in the YAML metadata block
5962−or as a command-line variable. (There are no other options in
5963−beamer and the rest of this section concerns reveal.js slideshows.)
5964−
5965−For reveal.js, you can instead use the reveal.js-native option
5966−`parallaxBackgroundImage`. You can also set `parallaxBackgroundHorizontal`
5967−and `parallaxBackgroundVertical` the same way and must also set
5968−`parallaxBackgroundSize` to have your values take effect.
5969−
5970−To set an image for a particular reveal.js slide, add
5971−`{data-background-image="/path/to/image"}`
5972−to the first slide-level heading on the slide (which may even be empty).
5973−
5974−In reveal.js's overview mode, the parallaxBackgroundImage will show up
5975−only on the first slide.
5976−
5977−Other reveal.js background settings also work on individual slides, including
5978−`data-background-size`, `data-background-repeat`, `data-background-color`,
5979−`data-transition`, and `data-transition-speed`.
5980−
5981−To add a background image to the automatically generated title slide, use the
5982−`title-slide-attributes` variable in the YAML metadata block. It must contain
5983−a map of attribute names and values.
5984−
5985−See the [reveal.js documentation](https://revealjs.com/backgrounds/) for more
5986−details.
5987−
5988−For example in reveal.js:
5989−
5990−```
5991−---
5992−title: My Slideshow
5993−parallaxBackgroundImage: /path/to/my/background_image.png
5994−title-slide-attributes:
5995− data-background-image: /path/to/title_image.png
5996− data-background-size: contain
5997−---
5998−
5999−## Slide One
6000−
6001−Slide 1 has background_image.png as its background.
6002−
6003−## {data-background-image="/path/to/special_image.jpg"}
4286+`shrink`.
60044287
6005−Slide 2 has a special image for its background, even though the heading has no content.
6006−```
6007−
6008−# EPUBs
4288+Creating EPUBs with pandoc
4289+==========================
60094290
6010−## EPUB Metadata
4291+EPUB Metadata
4292+-------------
60114293
60124294EPUB metadata may be specified using the `--epub-metadata` option, but
60134295if the source document is Markdown, it is better to use a [YAML metadata
@@ -6085,20 +4367,11 @@ The following fields are recognized:
60854367
60864368`rights`
60874369 ~ A string value.
6088−
6089−`belongs-to-collection`
6090− ~ A string value. identifies the name of a collection to which
6091− the EPUB Publication belongs.
6092−
6093−`group-position`
6094− ~ The `group-position` field indicates the numeric position in which
6095− the EPUB Publication belongs relative to other works belonging to
6096− the same `belongs-to-collection` field.
60974370
60984371`cover-image`
60994372 ~ A string value (path to cover image).
61004373
6101−`css` (or legacy: `stylesheet`)
4374+`stylesheet`
61024375 ~ A string value (path to CSS stylesheet).
61034376
61044377`page-progression-direction`
@@ -6115,200 +4388,32 @@ The following fields are recognized:
61154388 - `binding`: `true`|`false` (default `true`)
61164389 - `scroll-axis`: `vertical`|`horizontal`|`default`
61174390
6118−[MARC relators]: https://loc.gov/marc/relators/relaterm.html
4391+[MARC relators]: http://loc.gov/marc/relators/relaterm.html
61194392[`spine` element]: http://idpf.org/epub/301/spec/epub-publications.html#sec-spine-elem
61204393
6121−## The `epub:type` attribute
6122−
6123−For `epub3` output, you can mark up the heading that corresponds to an EPUB
6124−chapter using the [`epub:type` attribute][epub-type]. For example, to set
6125−the attribute to the value `prologue`, use this markdown:
6126−
6127− # My chapter {epub:type=prologue}
6128−
6129−Which will result in:
6130−
6131− <body epub:type="frontmatter">
6132− <section epub:type="prologue">
6133− <h1>My chapter</h1>
6134−
6135−Pandoc will output `<body epub:type="bodymatter">`, unless
6136−you use one of the following values, in which case either
6137−`frontmatter` or `backmatter` will be output.
6138−
6139−`epub:type` of first section `epub:type` of body
6140−---------------------------- ------------------
6141−prologue frontmatter
6142−abstract frontmatter
6143−acknowledgments frontmatter
6144−copyright-page frontmatter
6145−dedication frontmatter
6146−credits frontmatter
6147−keywords frontmatter
6148−imprint frontmatter
6149−contributors frontmatter
6150−other-credits frontmatter
6151−errata frontmatter
6152−revision-history frontmatter
6153−titlepage frontmatter
6154−halftitlepage frontmatter
6155−seriespage frontmatter
6156−foreword frontmatter
6157−preface frontmatter
6158−appendix backmatter
6159−colophon backmatter
6160−bibliography backmatter
6161−index backmatter
6162−
6163−[epub-type]: http://www.idpf.org/epub/31/spec/epub-contentdocs.html#sec-epub-type-attribute
6164−
6165−## Linked media
6166−
6167−By default, pandoc will download media referenced from any `<img>`, `<audio>`,
6168−`<video>` or `<source>` element present in the generated EPUB,
6169−and include it in the EPUB container, yielding a completely
4394+Linked media
4395+------------
4396+
4397+By default, pandoc will download linked media (including audio and
4398+video) and include it in the EPUB container, yielding a completely
61704399self-contained EPUB. If you want to link to external media resources
61714400instead, use raw HTML in your source and add `data-external="1"` to the tag
61724401with the `src` attribute. For example:
61734402
61744403 <audio controls="1">
6175− <source src="https://example.com/music/toccata.mp3"
4404+ <source src="http://example.com/music/toccata.mp3"
61764405 data-external="1" type="audio/mpeg">
61774406 </source>
61784407 </audio>
61794408
6180−# Jupyter notebooks
6181−
6182−When creating a [Jupyter notebook], pandoc will try to infer the
6183−notebook structure. Code blocks with the class `code` will be
6184−taken as code cells, and intervening content will be taken as
6185−Markdown cells. Attachments will automatically be created for
6186−images in Markdown cells. Metadata will be taken from the
6187−`jupyter` metadata field. For example:
6188−
6189−````
6190−---
6191−title: My notebook
6192−jupyter:
6193− nbformat: 4
6194− nbformat_minor: 5
6195− kernelspec:
6196− display_name: Python 2
6197− language: python
6198− name: python2
6199− language_info:
6200− codemirror_mode:
6201− name: ipython
6202− version: 2
6203− file_extension: ".py"
6204− mimetype: "text/x-python"
6205− name: "python"
6206− nbconvert_exporter: "python"
6207− pygments_lexer: "ipython2"
6208− version: "2.7.15"
6209−---
6210−
6211−# Lorem ipsum
6212−
6213−**Lorem ipsum** dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Nunc luctus
6214−bibendum felis dictum sodales.
6215−
6216−``` code
6217−print("hello")
6218−```
6219−
6220−## Pyout
6221−
6222−``` code
6223−from IPython.display import HTML
6224−HTML("""
6225−<script>
6226−console.log("hello");
6227−</script>
6228−<b>HTML</b>
6229−""")
6230−```
6231−
6232−## Image
6233−
6234−This image  will be
6235−included as a cell attachment.
6236−````
6237−
6238−If you want to add cell attributes, group cells differently, or
6239−add output to code cells, then you need to include divs to
6240−indicate the structure. You can use either [fenced
6241−divs][Extension: `fenced_divs`] or [native divs][Extension:
6242−`native_divs`] for this. Here is an example:
6243−
6244−````
6245−:::::: {.cell .markdown}
6246−# Lorem
6247−
6248−**Lorem ipsum** dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Nunc luctus
6249−bibendum felis dictum sodales.
6250−::::::
6251−
6252−:::::: {.cell .code execution_count=1}
6253−``` {.python}
6254−print("hello")
6255−```
6256−
6257−::: {.output .stream .stdout}
6258−```
6259−hello
6260−```
6261−:::
6262−::::::
6263−
6264−:::::: {.cell .code execution_count=2}
6265−``` {.python}
6266−from IPython.display import HTML
6267−HTML("""
6268−<script>
6269−console.log("hello");
6270−</script>
6271−<b>HTML</b>
6272−""")
6273−```
6274−
6275−::: {.output .execute_result execution_count=2}
6276−```{=html}
6277−<script>
6278−console.log("hello");
6279−</script>
6280−<b>HTML</b>
6281−hello
6282−```
6283−:::
6284−::::::
6285−````
6286−
6287−If you include raw HTML or TeX in an output cell, use the
6288−[raw attribute][Extension: `fenced_attribute`], as shown
6289−in the last cell of the example above. Although pandoc can
6290−process "bare" raw HTML and TeX, the result is often
6291−interspersed raw elements and normal textual elements, and
6292−in an output cell pandoc expects a single, connected raw
6293−block. To avoid using raw HTML or TeX except when
6294−marked explicitly using raw attributes, we recommend
6295−specifying the extensions `-raw_html-raw_tex+raw_attribute` when
6296−translating between Markdown and ipynb notebooks.
6297−
6298−Note that options and extensions that affect reading and
6299−writing of Markdown will also affect Markdown cells in ipynb
6300−notebooks. For example, `--wrap=preserve` will preserve
6301−soft line breaks in Markdown cells; `--atx-headers` will
6302−cause ATX-style headings to be used; and `--preserve-tabs` will
6303−prevent tabs from being turned to spaces.
6304−
6305−# Syntax highlighting
4409+Syntax highlighting
4410+===================
63064411
63074412Pandoc will automatically highlight syntax in [fenced code blocks] that
63084413are marked with a language name. The Haskell library [skylighting] is
6309−used for highlighting. Currently highlighting is supported only for
6310−HTML, EPUB, Docx, Ms, and LaTeX/PDF output. To see a list of language names
6311−that pandoc will recognize, type `pandoc --list-highlight-languages`.
4414+used for highlighting, which works in HTML, Docx, Ms, and LaTeX/PDF output.
4415+To see a list of language names that pandoc will recognize, type
4416+`pandoc --list-highlight-languages`.
63124417
63134418The color scheme can be selected using the `--highlight-style` option.
63144419The default color scheme is `pygments`, which imitates the default color
@@ -6316,36 +4421,15 @@ scheme used by the Python library pygments (though pygments is not actually
63164421used to do the highlighting). To see a list of highlight styles,
63174422type `pandoc --list-highlight-styles`.
63184423
6319−If you are not satisfied with the predefined styles, you can
6320−use `--print-highlight-style` to generate a JSON `.theme` file which
6321−can be modified and used as the argument to `--highlight-style`. To
6322−get a JSON version of the `pygments` style, for example:
6323−
6324− pandoc --print-highlight-style pygments > my.theme
6325−
6326−Then edit `my.theme` and use it like this:
6327−
6328− pandoc --highlight-style my.theme
6329−
6330−If you are not satisfied with the built-in highlighting, or you
6331−want highlight a language that isn't supported, you can use the
6332−`--syntax-definition` option to load a [KDE-style XML syntax definition
6333−file](https://docs.kde.org/stable5/en/kate/katepart/highlight.html).
6334−Before writing your own, have a look at KDE's [repository of syntax
6335−definitions](https://github.com/KDE/syntax-highlighting/tree/master/data/syntax).
6336−
63374424To disable highlighting, use the `--no-highlight` option.
63384425
63394426[skylighting]: https://github.com/jgm/skylighting
63404427
6341−# Custom Styles
6342−
6343−Custom styles can be used in the docx and ICML formats.
6344−
6345−## Output
4428+Custom Styles in Docx Output
4429+============================
63464430
6347−By default, pandoc's docx and ICML output applies a predefined set of styles
6348−for blocks such as paragraphs and block quotes, and uses largely default
4431+By default, pandoc's docx output applies a predefined set of styles for
4432+blocks such as paragraphs and block quotes, and uses largely default
63494433formatting (italics, bold) for inlines. This will work for most
63504434purposes, especially alongside a `reference.docx` file. However, if you
63514435need to apply your own styles to blocks, or match a preexisting set of
@@ -6353,10 +4437,8 @@ styles, pandoc allows you to define custom styles for blocks and text
63534437using `div`s and `span`s, respectively.
63544438
63554439If you define a `div` or `span` with the attribute `custom-style`,
6356−pandoc will apply your specified style to the contained elements (with
6357−the exception of elements whose function depends on a style, like
6358−headings, code blocks, block quotes, or links). So, for example, using
6359−the `bracketed_spans` syntax,
4440+pandoc will apply your specified style to the contained elements. So,
4441+for example using the `bracketed_spans` syntax,
63604442
63614443 [Get out]{custom-style="Emphatically"}, he said.
63624444
@@ -6372,9 +4454,9 @@ style `Emphatically`. Similarly, using the `fenced_divs` syntax,
63724454
63734455would style the two contained lines with the `Poetry` paragraph style.
63744456
6375−For docx output, styles will be defined in the output file as inheriting
6376−from normal text, if the styles are not yet in your reference.docx.
6377−If they are already defined, pandoc will not alter the definition.
4457+If the styles are not yet in your reference.docx, they will be defined
4458+in the output file as inheriting from normal text. If they are already
4459+defined, pandoc will not alter the definition.
63784460
63794461This feature allows for greatest customization in conjunction with
63804462[pandoc filters]. If you want all paragraphs after block quotes to be
@@ -6384,137 +4466,34 @@ want all italics to be transformed to the `Emphasis` character style
63844466transform all italicized inlines to inlines within an `Emphasis`
63854467custom-style `span`.
63864468
6387−For docx output, you don't need to enable any extensions for
6388−custom styles to work.
6389−
6390−[pandoc filters]: https://pandoc.org/filters.html
6391−
6392−## Input
6393−
6394−The docx reader, by default, only reads those styles that it can
6395−convert into pandoc elements, either by direct conversion or
6396−interpreting the derivation of the input document's styles.
6397−
6398−By enabling the [`styles` extension](#ext-styles) in the docx reader
6399−(`-f docx+styles`), you can produce output that maintains the styles
6400−of the input document, using the `custom-style` class. Paragraph
6401−styles are interpreted as divs, while character styles are interpreted
6402−as spans.
4469+[pandoc filters]: http://pandoc.org/filters.html
64034470
6404−For example, using the `custom-style-reference.docx` file in the test
6405−directory, we have the following different outputs:
4471+Custom writers
4472+==============
64064473
6407−Without the `+styles` extension:
4474+Pandoc can be extended with custom writers written in [lua]. (Pandoc
4475+includes a lua interpreter, so lua need not be installed separately.)
64084476
6409− $ pandoc test/docx/custom-style-reference.docx -f docx -t markdown
6410− This is some text.
6411−
6412− This is text with an *emphasized* text style. And this is text with a
6413− **strengthened** text style.
6414−
6415− > Here is a styled paragraph that inherits from Block Text.
6416−
6417−And with the extension:
6418−
6419− $ pandoc test/docx/custom-style-reference.docx -f docx+styles -t markdown
6420−
6421− ::: {custom-style="First Paragraph"}
6422− This is some text.
6423− :::
6424−
6425− ::: {custom-style="Body Text"}
6426− This is text with an [emphasized]{custom-style="Emphatic"} text style.
6427− And this is text with a [strengthened]{custom-style="Strengthened"}
6428− text style.
6429− :::
6430−
6431− ::: {custom-style="My Block Style"}
6432− > Here is a styled paragraph that inherits from Block Text.
6433− :::
6434−
6435−With these custom styles, you can use your input document as a
6436−reference-doc while creating docx output (see below), and maintain the
6437−same styles in your input and output files.
6438−
6439−# Custom writers
6440−
6441−Pandoc can be extended with custom writers written in [Lua]. (Pandoc
6442−includes a Lua interpreter, so Lua need not be installed separately.)
6443−
6444−To use a custom writer, simply specify the path to the Lua script
4477+To use a custom writer, simply specify the path to the lua script
64454478in place of the output format. For example:
64464479
64474480 pandoc -t data/sample.lua
64484481
6449−Creating a custom writer requires writing a Lua function for each
4482+Creating a custom writer requires writing a lua function for each
64504483possible element in a pandoc document. To get a documented example
64514484which you can modify according to your needs, do
64524485
64534486 pandoc --print-default-data-file sample.lua
64544487
6455−Note that custom writers have no default template. If you want
6456−to use `--standalone` with a custom writer, you will need to
6457−specify a template manually using `--template` or add a new
6458−default template with the name
6459−`default.NAME_OF_CUSTOM_WRITER.lua` to the `templates`
6460−subdirectory of your user data directory (see [Templates]).
6461−
6462−[Lua]: https://www.lua.org
6463−
6464−# Reproducible builds
6465−
6466−Some of the document formats pandoc targets (such as EPUB,
6467−docx, and ODT) include build timestamps in the generated document.
6468−That means that the files generated on successive builds will
6469−differ, even if the source does not. To avoid this, set the
6470−`SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH` environment variable, and the timestamp will
6471−be taken from it instead of the current time.
6472−`SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH` should contain an integer unix timestamp
6473−(specifying the number of second since midnight UTC January 1, 1970).
6474−
6475−Some document formats also include a unique identifier. For
6476−EPUB, this can be set explicitly by setting the `identifier`
6477−metadata field (see [EPUB Metadata], above).
6478−
6479−# A note on security
6480−
6481−If you use pandoc to convert user-contributed content in a web
6482−application, here are some things to keep in mind:
6483−
6484−1. Although pandoc itself will not create or modify any files other
6485− than those you explicitly ask it create (with the exception
6486− of temporary files used in producing PDFs), a filter or custom
6487− writer could in principle do anything on your file system. Please
6488− audit filters and custom writers very carefully before using them.
6489−
6490−2. If your application uses pandoc as a Haskell library (rather than
6491− shelling out to the executable), it is possible to use it in a mode
6492− that fully isolates pandoc from your file system, by running the
6493− pandoc operations in the `PandocPure` monad. See the document
6494− [Using the pandoc API](https://pandoc.org/using-the-pandoc-api.html)
6495− for more details.
6496−
6497−3. Pandoc's parsers can exhibit pathological performance on some
6498− corner cases. It is wise to put any pandoc operations under
6499− a timeout, to avoid DOS attacks that exploit these issues.
6500− If you are using the pandoc executable, you can add the
6501− command line options `+RTS -M512M -RTS` (for example) to limit
6502− the heap size to 512MB.
6503−
6504−4. The HTML generated by pandoc is not guaranteed to be safe.
6505− If `raw_html` is enabled for the Markdown input, users can
6506− inject arbitrary HTML. Even if `raw_html` is disabled,
6507− users can include dangerous content in URLs and attributes.
6508− To be safe, you should run all the generated HTML through
6509− an HTML sanitizer.
6510−
6511−# Authors
6512−
6513−Copyright 2006--2021 John MacFarlane (jgm@berkeley.edu). Released
4488+[lua]: http://www.lua.org
4489+
4490+Authors
4491+=======
4492+
4493+Copyright 2006-2017 John MacFarlane (jgm@berkeley.edu). Released
65144494under the [GPL], version 2 or greater. This software carries no
65154495warranty of any kind. (See COPYRIGHT for full copyright and
65164496warranty notices.) For a full list of contributors, see the file
65174497AUTHORS.md in the pandoc source code.
65184498
6519−[GPL]: https://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html "GNU General Public License"
6520−[YAML]: https://yaml.org/spec/1.2/spec.html "YAML v1.2 Spec"
4499+[GPL]: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html "GNU General Public License"